Revit MEP 2009

Imperial Tutorial

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Secondary Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System . Creating the Primary System Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Primary System Equipment . . . . . . . . . Inspecting and Color Coding the System . . . . . . . . . Creating Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Electrical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 31 . 35 . 39 . 45 . 47 . 47 . 57 . 60 . 63 . 72

Developing Your MEP Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

v

Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 77 . 88 . 94 . 95

Chapter 4

Mechanical Systems: Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . 101 . 108 . 112 . 136 . 141 . 148 . 153 . 156 . 160 . 162 . 168 . 185

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems: Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 . 189 . 196 . 200 . 204 . 217 . 230 . 249 . 252 . 260 . 263

Chapter 6

Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 269 . 274 . 280 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 291 . 296 . 303 . 304 . 309 . 314 . 320 . 325 . 331 . 338

Chapter 7

Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 . 344 . 345 . 346

vi | Contents

Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 346 . 352 . 359 . 371 . 376 . 382 . 390 . 398

Chapter 8

Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 . 406 . 410 . 432 . 445 . 451 . 458

Chapter 9

Creating Revit MEP Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Modifying Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Fan Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family . Modifying Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Water Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Light Fixture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol Family . . . . . . . . . . . . Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 . 470 . 474 . 483 . 488 . 491 . 493 . 498 . 498 . 507 . 518 . 555 . 561 . 561 . 568 . 568 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 571 . 571

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . 577 . 582 . 589 . 595 . 599 . 599 . 602 . 605 . 607 . 610 . 615 . 615

Contents | vii

Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Chapter 11

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 . 631 . 637 . 641 . 644 . 644 . 649 . 651 . 654 . 656 . 662 . 670 . 673 . 673 . 675 . 678 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 684

Chapter 12

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 . 688 . 692 . 692 . 702 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 713

Chapter 13

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 . 720 . 727 . 731 . 732 . 735 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 742 . 743 . 745

Chapter 14

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 . 761 . 767 . 767 . 769

viii | Contents

Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 769 . 773 . 779 . 779 . 781 . 783 . 784 . 790 . 791 . 791 . 792

Chapter 15

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Chapter 16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 . 815 . 823 . 827 . 830 . 830 . 833 . 836 . 836

Chapter 17

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 . 840 . 840 . 844 . 848 . 851 . 856

Chapter 18

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . 862 . 872 . 879

Chapter 19

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 . 894 . 903 . 906

Contents | ix

Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 908 . 911 . 911 . 913 . 916 . 918 . 919

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Chapter 21 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 . 925 . 927 . 929 . 930 . 933 . 933 . 937 . 939 . 942 . 947 . 949 . 950 . 953 . 953 . 954 . 959 . 961 . 964 . 965 . 967

x | Contents

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.

3

■ ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. 10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2009?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

Understanding the Basics | 5

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2009 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows, doors, and cabinets are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You

Understanding the Basics | 7

create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Edit. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. This creates a new project based on the default template. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. For example. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. click (New). While working in the drawing area. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. which are listed on the menu. The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. By default. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. you type the required key combination to perform the command. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. and View. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. In addition.

Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. When you select the Door tool. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. a door type is specified. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project.

The Show Design Bars dialog displays. For example. 9 In the Type Selector. In the drawing area. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . ■ The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. when you add a door.

11 Click OK. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. containing buttons grouped by function. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. click the tab in the Design Bar. immediately below the Type Selector.

reports. and groups. schedules. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and groups of your current project: ■ Right-click in the browser to add. select Views (all).TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. In the Project Browser. delete. families. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. and rename views. families. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. sheets.

making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. To open a view. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. The cursor displays as a pencil. Do not click. walls. double-click its name. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. The browser is dockable. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. click Wall. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 3D). The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. family category (doors. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. windows). click Cancel. elevations.■ The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. After creating a browser organization scheme. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. and group name. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog.

16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. find a keyword on the Index tab. The status bar also provides information. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. When you place the cursor over an element. In this case. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu.In the bottom left corner of the window. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. There are several tools that help you find information. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. In the status bar. regarding selected elements in a view. click Modify to end the Wall command. You can use this tri-pane. in conjunction with tooltips." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. It highlights when the cursor is over it. 18 On the Design Bar. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. 20 Press TAB. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. Revit MEP 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2009 Help.

rvt. Toolbar: From the toolbar. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 17 . For example. Windows: From any window. Click the Help button. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. In the following steps. click Training Files. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. click on the Standard toolbar. There are several ways to access zoom options. press F1 for help. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. If no Help button displays. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP In this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Tooltips: To see tooltips. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. After you are familiar with these tasks. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. press F1 for context-sensitive help. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.In addition. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse.

and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. When you release the mouse button. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the drawing area. the view zooms out from the building model. 7 Click in the drawing area.The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 5 On the View toolbar. the view zooms in on the selected area. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.

use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. moving the wheel to the desired location.9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 15 To exit the wheel. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. click Settings menu ➤ Options. 13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. For more information about SteeringWheels. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 19 . and click the SteeringWheels tab. on the View toolbar. and click Help. 10 To display SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. press ESC. . As you move the mouse. NOTE As you zoom in and out.

and on the Tools toolbar. click (Move). referred to as shape handles. When drawing or modifying a building model.Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. Similar controls. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. expand Views (all). These are the drag controls. Cnst. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. and double-click 2nd Flr. to lengthen the wall. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. 17 Type ZR. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 18 Click and drag the left control. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. and select the wall. bottoms. display along the ends. expand Floor Plans. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Small blue dots. as shown. called drag controls.

require 2 clicks to complete the command. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. The table moves down. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.Some commands. 24 Select the plant. such as Move and Copy. 23 Click next to the lower wall. click to specify the starting position. for example. and drag it on top of the table. you want to move the table closer to the wall. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 21 . as shown. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. In this case. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. click Modify. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. on the Standard toolbar. and click again to end it. click the Undo command. 26 On the Undo menu. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this example. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. or press CTRL+Z. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click Lines. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice. 29 To end the command. such as the Lines command. Some commands.Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. select the second item in the list. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).

Express Workshop 23 .

24 .

Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. Creating a Supply Air System In this lesson. Finally. and exhaust systems using these components. you can create supply. After air terminals and mechanical equipment are placed in a model. return. The systems are used to perform calculations and analysis. you create a supply air system that consists of 2 low pressure. 25 . When you have finished these tutorials. you will have a basic understanding of Revit MEP design and documentation tools.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that are integral to the most common MEP workflows. and size the ductwork. high pressure system. which is the physical representation of the system. and to place and size ductwork. connect it to existing air terminals. The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an MEP project. creating the primary supply system. To create Mechanical Supply Air 2. You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. an HVAC system is a logical connection between air terminals and HVAC mechanical equipment. you add and connect the air handler. you place the variable air volume (VAV) box. secondary supply air systems and a primary. In Revit MEP.

2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. In this exercise. At the beginning of this exercise. right-click the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you place a parallel. VAV box in the model. scroll until the folder is displayed. click the Mechanical tab. and click Mechanical. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Creating a Secondary Supply Air System In this exercise. The Mechanical commands are displayed. you create the logical system shown above on the left. In the left pane of the Open dialog. fan-powered. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Supply Air System.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. the model contains one completed secondary supply air system. click Training Files. You then define a logical connection between the VAV box and 4 existing air terminals. If necessary. Display the Mechanical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. creating a secondary supply system.

you can enter ZE to zoom out. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. To pan. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 27 . The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. In this tutorial.In this tutorial. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. roll the wheel. Add a VAV box 7 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. The entire model displays on the screen. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 4 Type ZR. you find the command at the far left of the screen. hold the wheel down and drag. Then. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. To zoom in and out. The model zooms to the specified area.

8 inch Inlet. click Modify to end the command. The cursor displays as the VAV box outline. the Type Selector displays the mechanical equipment that is pre-loaded in the model. 9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4. on the Options Bar. but do not click. 11 Click to place the VAV box in the location shown. 10 Press SPACEBAR once to rotate the VAV box 90 degrees. 12 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. select Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 3 . 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Directly above the Design Bar.

This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. 18 Click to select the air terminal. or just 10. ■ 15 Click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box.Airflow.200000 (20%). Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 29 . After the system is created. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. for Offset. and click Element Properties. You do not need to enter the units. you can enter 10 0 without units. Create the system 17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it. verify that SupplyAirFlow is set to 900 CFM.13 Right-click the VAV box. indicating that it has been selected. Verify that the PrimaryToSupplyRatio is 0. enter 10' 0". this value is automatically updated to reflect the supply airflow requirement.) ■ Under Mechanical . 19 Move the cursor off the air terminal. The air terminal turns red. This value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the Level 1 ceiling and the Level 2 floor.

click (Edit System). 25 On the Design Bar.20 While pressing CTRL. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Select Equipment For System). 24 Select the VAV box you just placed. The Options Bar displays system information such as the system name. Verify the elements of the system 26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created. click 23 On the Options Bar. (Create Supply Air System). move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right. and click to select it. 21 While pressing CTRL. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected air terminals. select the 2 supply air terminals to the right. the air terminals display in red. and the number of elements that make up the system. The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system. the equipment supplying the system. 27 On the Options bar. indicating that they are selected. click Modify to end the command. 22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. You have created a secondary supply air system that includes 4 air terminals and a VAV box.

3 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics highlight. you create the physical connection for the system. Verify the connections between the system elements 29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. In this exercise. for Solution Type. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. you leave it unchanged. 28 In the Supply Air : Mechanical Supply Air 2 dialog. however. showing the logical connection between the components of the system. click (Layout Path). the secondary supply air system shown below on the left. you complete the secondary system by adding ductwork. Do not click. You could change the name by overwriting it. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 30 Press TAB. select Network. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System The model now contains the logical connection for Mechanical Supply Air System 2. Next. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 31 .Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2.rvt. 31 Move the cursor off the air terminal. Specify the layout 1 Select an air terminal in the system you created. In this tutorial. 2 On the Options Bar. the ductwork. click Finish.

select Main. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Settings. piping. select Branch. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. Verify that Offset is 10' 0".A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green. click solutions. click Finish Layout. 11 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex . 8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. 9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. 7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Configuring the layout path settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during the project. (Show Next Solution) to display other suggested network 5 Click until the network solution shown below displays. which is located to the far left of the drawing area. thus maintaining the consistency of these systems within the project. 10 Click OK. plumbing. The layout path settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". and fire protection systems. 4 On the Options Bar. for Duct Type.Round. Specify the layout path settings 6 On the Options Bar. for Duct Type. Verify that the Maximum Flex Duct Length is 2’ 0”.

fittings. and enter . 20 Click OK. the system has not been created properly. 14 Press TAB. You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components. or click in an empty part of the drawing area. click View menu ➤ Shading with Edges. and Static Regain. If the entire network does not highlight. 13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. click Sizing. Velocity. 12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading. A disconnection will negatively impact calculations involving this system. Select Flex Ducts.Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect the components of the system. 18 On the Options Bar.08 in-wg/100ft. The branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Select Ducts. Click Check None. and a disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. 15 Press TAB again to highlight the next level of connections. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 33 . and equipment is highlighted. Equal Friction. Select Duct Fittings. Do not click. select Friction. Check the connectivity of the system You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key. Revit MEP supports 4 of the most common sizing methods: Friction. 17 Click to select the highlighted system. 16 Press TAB until the entire hierarchy of connected ducts. 22 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ Under Sizing Method. and type SD. Size the duct system 21 On the Options Bar.

for Branch Sizing. 37 Click OK. 36 On the Options Bar. scroll to Mechanical .Airflow. click Modify to end the command. The Flow value of 150 CFM matches the required flow for the air terminal. 30 Select the segment of duct shown. 31 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). scroll to Mechanical . 38 Press ESC to clear the selection. 29 Press ESC to clear the selection. click (Element Properties). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Mechanical . The Flow value of 300 CFM is the sum of the 2 air terminals. 35 Select the VAV box in the system. Under Constraints. 24 On the Design Bar. select Calculated Size Only. The ductwork is sized using the friction method at . 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Next. select the segment of duct shown.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. The ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings. 33 Click OK.■ ■ Verify that Only is selected. you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. click (Element Properties).Airflow. 23 Click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box. 28 Click OK. 34 Press ESC to clear the selection. Verify the sizing 25 In the system you created. the adjusted SupplyAirFlow value of 625 CFM for the VAV reflects the supply airflow values calculated for the system. 26 On the Options Bar. In the Element Properties dialog.Airflow.

5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV. in the location shown by the pencil. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 To start the duct run. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 35 . For D:. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. click Duct. 2 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. This specifies the duct diameter. and click to place the second segment of ductwork and end the run.Creating the Primary System Ductwork In this exercise. ■ The cursor displays as a pencil. Create the primary air duct 1 On the Design Bar. you create the main trunk line for the primary system and connect the 2 secondary systems.rvt. select Round Duct : Taps. click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems. select 12". select 10' 0". 4 Click in the location shown to end the first segment of ductwork. For Offset.

do the following: ■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar. 8 Type ZR. 11 Place the cursor over the end of the duct to display an endpoint snap point. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. The model is zoomed to the end of the duct. The ductwork and the proper fittings are automatically created. click Duct Fitting. 10 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Design Bar. This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct sizing. ■ ■ Click again to undo to first section of duct. 7 If your trunk line does not match the above illustration and you want to draw it again. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Draw the main trunk line again.6 Press ESC twice to end the command. Add an end cap Before you size the ductwork for a system. as described above. you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except for the end that connects to the air source. click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct. and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line.

closing the right end of the duct run. select Connector 0 : Supply Air: Round : 8" Primary Air Connector. 20 Select the primary air duct. the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen. click Modify to end the command. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 37 .12 Press TAB until the point snap graphic shown below displays. 18 In the Select Connector dialog. 15 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Connect one secondary system You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. you use the Connect Into tool to automatically draw the duct. 13 Click to place the end cap. First. In addition to the graphic at the cursor. This connects the end cap to the ductwork. (Connect Into). 16 Select the leftmost VAV. click 19 Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar.

38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you manually draw the connecting duct. and click Draw Duct. Connect the other secondary system Next. 21 Type ZR.Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap connection. 22 Select the VAV box. 23 Right-click the 8” inlet supply connector. and zoom in on the rightmost VAV box.

you add and connect the air handler for the primary system.rvt. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 39 . 2 In the Type Selector. i Express Workshop Supply Air System.24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X) displays. Place the air handler 1 On the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor to the location shown. click Mechanical Equipment. The ductwork is created with a tap connection. Next. Adding the Primary System Equipment In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 26 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. primary system. Do not click. select Air Handler : 10 ton. you place an air handler and connect it to the main trunk line to complete the high pressure. 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

7 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the air handler to the location shown. Create a vertical section of duct 8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it.The cursor displays as the air handler outline. Do not click. click Modify to end the command. 6 Click to place the air handler. 4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

and click Draw Duct. return. and exhaust. for the hydronic supply and return. 11 Right-click the connector. 10 Move the cursor over the 24" x 24" supply connector. are also visible. intake.9 Click to select the air handler. The connectors on the top of the unit are displayed. These are the connectors for the air handler supply. click (Apply Current Offset). 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. select Rectangular Duct/Radius Elbows Tees. ■ Adding the Primary System Equipment | 41 . Under Offset. The connectors on the front of the unit. On the Options Bar. select 10' 0".

19 Move the cursor to the right. 14 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. 15 Double-click 3D HVAC. and click Draw Duct. 18 Right-click the center point of the duct. and click. The vertical section of duct you just created is visible. 16 Close the 3D HVAC view. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .A vertical section of duct is created. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. past the end of the primary duct. Attach a rectangular duct 17 Select the vertical duct you just created. 13 Press ESC.

22 On the Options bar: ■ Click Click (Create Supply Air System). Create the main system logical connection 21 While pressing CTRL. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the air handler. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 43 . (Select Equipment for System).20 Press ESC twice to end the command. 24 Press ESC. click (Element Properties). and then select the rightmost VAV box. ■ 23 Select the air handler. select the leftmost VAV box. The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components.

notice that the value for SupplyAirFlow is 32.815 CFM. 36 Click OK. click (Trim/Extend).Airflow. 31 Select the 24" x 24" rectangular supply duct by clicking a point on the duct between the air handler and the primary trunk line. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Mechanical . This is the capacity of the air handler. In the Element Properties dialog. the value for SupplyAirFlow has been updated based upon the primary to supply ratio you specified in the element properties of the 2 VAV boxes. click System Browser. View the system components 38 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Click OK. 34 Select the air handler. click (Element Properties). The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings. verify that (Trim/Extend to Corner) is selected. under Mechanical .In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the primary 12" round duct. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 Press ESC to clear the selection. 28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection. Connect the ductwork 29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar.Airflow.

The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. you inspect the system and color code the ductwork. you inspect part of the system you created. Next. Inspecting and Color Coding the System In this exercise. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. the secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting and Color Coding the System | 45 . Inspect the completed supply air system 1 In the Project Browser. and the secondary system that was already in the model when you opened it. and double-click 3D HVAC. close the System Browser. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. You then add a legend to automatically color code the ductwork based on specific calculated values. click (System Inspect). 39 In the System Browser. 41 When you are done. 40 Expand any Supply Air system to view its HVAC components. expand Mechanical (3 systems). 2 Select a section of a secondary system.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Place a legend and color code the ductwork Color coding the ductwork provides a quick. The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow values. 6 On the Design Bar. click Inspect. The flow arrows indicate flow direction. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Flow. 11 Click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. under Color Scheme. 9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler. select Duct Color Fill . Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork 12 Select the legend. static pressure. and pressure loss. 7 Close the 3D HVAC view. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. the other systems are displayed in half tone. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. click Cancel Inspector. visual indication of a system’s air flow. the red arrows indicate critical flow path. The inspection tag describes the section that is being inspected. 4 On the Design Bar. including flow.The selected system maintains its appearance. 5 Move the cursor over a section of the system.

lighting fixtures. Electrical settings have already been specified for the model. Creating a Supply Air System. One circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on one side of a room in the model. click 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. you create the physical connections between the components: the wiring. . and insulation type). the other circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on the other side of the room. junction boxes. temperature rating. and switches. Wiring types (including material. distribution systems. You then automatically balance the electrical loads on a panelboard. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. receptacles. under Schemes. and demand factors have been defined. 16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window. You use the System Browser to view the created circuits. The model already contains the electrical components you use to create the systems. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. (Delete) to delete the legend. junction boxes. The legend remains selected. 18 When prompted to save the model. power circuits. and the color scheme is removed from the legend. including power panels. After creating the logical connections. voltage definitions. click 15 Click OK. Creating Electrical Systems | 47 . The color is removed from the ductwork. Revit MEP ensures that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. and a 480V panelboard that have already been placed in the model. Creating Lighting Circuits In this exercise. you create 2 lighting circuits using lighting fixtures. click No. As you create circuits. select none. 14 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.13 On the Options Bar. Creating Electrical Systems In this lesson. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. click the Electrical tab. scroll until the folder is displayed. In this tutorial. 2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. you find the command at the far left of the screen.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. Display the Electrical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. and click Electrical. right-click the Design Bar. The Electrical commands are displayed. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . In the left pane of the Open dialog. If necessary. click Training Files. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar.

Then. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. The entire model displays on the screen. In this tutorial. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. hold the wheel down and drag. you can enter ZE to zoom out. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. Create a lighting circuit 7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model. 4 Type ZR. To pan. Creating Lighting Circuits | 49 . The model zooms to the specified area.Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. To zoom in and out. roll the wheel. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region.

they display in red. and click to select it.The lighting fixture highlights. The lighting fixture turns red. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures. indicating that they are selected. move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures. 8 Click to select the lighting fixture. 11 While pressing CTRL. 10 While pressing CTRL. 9 Move the cursor off the lighting fixture. indicating that it has been selected.

which is the logical connection between the elements. click 14 Select lighting panel LP-1. (Select a Panel for the Circuit).12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits | 51 . The red sketch graphics show the created circuit. click (Create Power Circuit). The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 13 On the Options Bar.

all the elements within the window are selected. 17 When you release the mouse button. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .15 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. Create a second lighting circuit 16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as shown.

click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the created circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits | 53 . Select Lighting Fixtures. 20 While pressing CTRL. click 23 Select lighting panel LP-1.18 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. Click Check None. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). click (Create Power Circuit). click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it. The lighting fixtures remain selected. which is the logical connection between the elements.

24 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. 26 Press TAB to display the circuit.The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run. Do not click. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Modify a circuit At this point. 25 Move the cursor over a lighting fixture in the leftmost circuit so that the lighting fixture highlights. The components include the 4 lighting fixtures and the junction box. you have created 2 lighting circuits.

Verify the modified circuit 32 Highlight the junction box in the circuit and press TAB. 30 Select the junction box located among the lighting fixtures. click Finish. 31 In the Power : 1 dialog. 29 In the Power : 1 dialog. 28 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits | 55 . click (Edit Circuit). click (Add To Circuit).The circuit includes 4 lighting fixtures. 27 Click to select the highlighted circuit.

At this point. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Electrical (7 Systems) ➤ Power ➤ LP-1. Next. close the System Browser. and you can view the system components using the System Browser. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. click System Browser. The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. are created. The circuits become visible when the physical connections. 37 Expand the 2 circuits to view their electrical components. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. the wiring. 36 In the System Browser. 33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting. only the logical connections between the elements exist. 34 Select lighting panel LP-1. 38 When you are done. Display the electrical systems The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP.The modified circuit is highlighted. 35 On the Design Bar. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. you assign switches to control the lighting fixtures. You can display the logical connections using the TAB key.

3 On the Options Bar. click (Create Switch System). 4 In the Switch System dialog.rvt. click (Edit Switch System). you create switch systems to define switching behavior. click 5 Select the switch as shown. The switches have already been placed in the model. The sketch graphics show the only currently selected component of the system. 2 On the Options Bar. (Select Switch).Creating Switch Systems In this exercise. The 4 lighting fixtures on the left of the room are controlled by one switch. Creating Switch Systems | 57 . i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. Create a switch system 1 Select the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the room. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. All elements in the drawing except the selected lighting fixture display in halftone. and the 4 lighting fixtures on the right are controlled by another switch.

The Options Bar displays the selected switch and the number of lighting fixtures currently selected (1). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. As you select each lighting fixture. select the 3 remaining lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. click (Switch Properties). 13 Press TAB. and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area. 10 Click OK. 6 In the Switch System dialog. The identifier A is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Add to System). for Switch ID. The switch system highlights. under Electrical . enter A. Assign an identifier to the switch 8 In the Switch System dialog. click Finish. the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated. 7 One by one. Verify the switch system 12 Move the cursor over the switch to highlight it. 11 In the Switch System (A) dialog.Lighting.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. (Select Switch). The selection is filtered. Creating Switch Systems | 59 . click 21 Select the switch as shown. 20 In the Switch System dialog. click 19 On the Options Bar. Create a second switch system 15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. 25 In the Switch System (B) dialog. Click Check None. Select Lighting Fixtures. (Edit Switch System). click (Create Switch System). The identifier B is assigned to the switch for reference purposes.Lighting. click 17 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 24 Click OK. Assign an identifier to the switch 22 In the Switch System dialog. under Electrical .14 Move the cursor away from the switch system to remove the highlighting. The 4 lighting fixtures remain selected. Click OK. click (Switch Properties). enter B. 16 On the Options Bar. for Switch ID. click Finish. 18 On the Options Bar.

rvt. you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures. The lighting requirements for the left side of the room are different from the lighting requirements for the right side of the room. Next. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. 3 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. you define the lighting fixture types for the room.Verify the switch system 26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. so each side of the room requires a different lighting fixture type. you add a tag to each lighting fixture that identifies its type and the switch that controls it. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. Then. The lighting fixture is labeled with an automatically generated tag. Tag the lighting fixtures 1 On the Design Bar.

4 One by one. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type Mark. Tagging Lighting Fixtures | 61 . click Edit/New. The top part of the tag displays the identifier for the lighting fixture type. Create a new lighting fixture type 6 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. 12 Click OK.The bottom part of the tag displays the identifier (A) for the switch that controls the lighting fixture. 5 Press ESC to end the command. under Identity Data. select the remaining 7 lighting fixtures in the room. click OK. The selected lighting fixtures are tagged. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK. which you have not yet defined. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog: ■ ■ Enter 2x4 3Lamp A. 14 Press ESC to clear the selection. 7 On the Options Bar. enter A. select (Element Properties). click Duplicate.

The top part of the tag for the lighting fixture with the new type (Troffer Corner Insert . For each lighting fixture. select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. 17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. click (Match Type). Change the type for some lighting fixtures 15 On the Tools toolbar. in the Type Selector. and their tags are automatically updated. 20 On the Options Bar.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp A) is automatically updated to display type mark A. 16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp B. and the tag is updated. select Troffer Corner Insert . 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 18 Press ESC twice to end the command. The cursor displays as an eyedropper. Change the type for the remaining lighting fixtures 19 While pressing CTRL. The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type. the type is changed.

You then connect the 2 circuits to create a multi-circuit home run. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. Creating Power Circuits In this exercise. Turn off the tags 22 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The lighting fixture tags are no longer displayed in the model. on the Annotation Categories tab. One circuit connects 2 electrical receptacles in a small room. you use electrical receptacles and a 208 volt panelboard that have already been placed in the model to create 2 electrical circuits with arc type wiring. you create electrical circuits with wiring. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Creating Power Circuits | 63 . Next. 23 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. while the other connects the 8 receptacles in the adjoining large room. 25 Click OK.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. select the 2 receptacles in the small room. Create a power circuit with wiring 1 While holding down CTRL. 24 Clear Lighting Fixture Tags. scroll to Lighting Fixture Tags.

(Select a Panel for the Circuit). 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click 4 Select power panel PP-1. The sketch graphics show the created circuit home run. click (Create Power Circuit).2 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the logical created circuit.

View conductor information 7 Type ZR. 6 Press ESC to clear the selection. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. 8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command. click as shown to create arc type wiring. Creating Power Circuits | 65 .5 In the drawing area near the created circuit. You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner.

verify the number of conductors of each type (hot. under Electrical .9 Select the wire shown. neutral. select the receptacle as shown. 14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to clear the selection. and ground).Loads. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Element Properties). The tick marks indicate the number of conductors (3) for the wire. Create a second circuit with wiring 15 In the large room.

The sketch graphics show the circuit. 18 On the Options Bar. for a total of 8 receptacles. click (Create Power Circuit). Creating Power Circuits | 67 . click 19 Select power panel PP-1. (Select a Panel for the Circuit).16 While pressing CTRL. select the remaining receptacles in the large room. 17 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the circuit and home run.

The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. click as shown to create arc type wiring. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run.20 In the drawing area near the created circuit.

23 Right-click. and zoom in on the region shown. click Wire. Creating Power Circuits | 69 . Rewire a circuit 22 Select the home run wire for the small circuit. 24 Type ZR.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. The cursor displays as a pencil with arc type wiring. and click Delete. The wire is deleted. 25 On the Design Bar.

26 Move the cursor to the location shown. press TAB until the graphic displays. press TAB until the graphic displays. 28 Move the cursor to the location shown. In addition to the graphic in the drawing. the displayed snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. If the cursor is positioned as shown. click to place the end of the wire. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . If the cursor is positioned as shown. 29 With the point snap graphic displayed. click to place the end of the wire. The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. 27 With the point snap graphic displayed.

select Leader. 30 On the Design Bar. View the multi-circuit home run 31 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. 34 Highlight a wire in the small circuit as shown. Creating Power Circuits | 71 . click Modify to end the command. click Tag ➤ By Category.The two circuits are automatically connected. Tag the wires 32 On the Design Bar. The wires in the circuit have been automatically resized to accommodate the demand created by the new multi-circuit home run. 33 On the Options Bar. The 2 arrows on the large circuit home run indicate that it is now a multi-circuit home run. creating a multi-circuit home run.

35 Click to place the label. you view the panel schedule report for panelboard PP-1 and balance the electrical loads on this panel. Next. scroll down as needed. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. 38 On the Design Bar. click (Panel Schedule Report). 2 On the Options Bar. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1). Balancing Electrical Loads In this exercise. 36 Highlight a wire in the large circuit as shown.rvt. The Panel Schedule Report view opens. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1). you balance the electrical loads on panelboard PP-1. 37 Click to place the label. PP-1 is highlighted to show that it is the currently displayed view. View the panel schedule report 1 Select power panel PP-1. 3 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems.

and click Properties. The loads are balanced across each phase. click OK. All the circuits connected to the panel are listed. A. under Other. and the circuit structure is automatically reorganized. Balance the loads on the panel 9 Select power panel PP-1.4 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog. right-click PP-1. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. (Edit Circuits on Panel). and the current loads on phases. B. 8 Close the Panel Schedule Report view. and C. click Rebalance Loads. Balancing Electrical Loads | 73 . 12 Click OK. click The Edit Circuits dialog displays. click Edit. under Panel Schedule. 10 On the Options Bar. are shown. for Appearance on Sheet. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click OK.

You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Electrical Systems. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click No.The reorganized circuit structure is reflected in the wire labels. 14 When prompted to save the model. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Developing Your MEP Designs 75 .

76 .

After finishing each exercise. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In this exercise. you first carefully plan the system. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing.Mechanical Systems 3 In this tutorial. you perform a heating and cooling load analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. As you create the mechanical system. as with any design project.autodesk. and contain information about the locations in which they are placed. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. you configure the linked architectural model. you place spaces in the areas of the building model. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. At the end of this tutorial. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis. First. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2009. go to http://www. This system consists of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you create a plenum level and place various types of spaces. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spacial environment. By following the recommended workflow. After applying a color scheme to the zones. In this lesson. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you can choose to save your work. Then. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you will understand the process. you plan the system by first placing spaces in the building. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. methodology. If the tutorial datasets are not present. Planning Mechanical Systems To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. 77 .

The elevation view opens. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 Mech. Configure the linked model The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Mech. This makes the architectural components (such as walls and floors) room-bounding so that they are recognized as boundaries for spaces. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 On the Basics tab of the Design bar. 78 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . click Modify. 6 In the Project Browser.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the building. you add a level for plenums. click Edit/New. Next. These components are defined in the architectural dataset. and click Element Properties. NOTE When working with a linked file. and click OK twice. right-click. and after the linked model highlights. make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser. In this section. click the Training Files icon. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate heating and cooling load analysis. The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays. Open the i Spaces. not in the MEP dataset. and double-click East . The linked model is configured. select Room Bounding. The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.

for Level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and its listed in the Project Browser under Mechanical ➤ ???. For Cut plane. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and click Properties. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Placing Spaces | 79 . In the View Range dialog. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 7 is created. and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan. and press ENTER. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. ■ 10 Draw a plenum level 8' 6" above Level 1. verify that Level : Plenum is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK twice. click Yes. select Level Above (Level 2). expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 9 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 7. click Level.7 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name. Under Identity Data. If asked to rename the corresponding level and views. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. Click Plan View Types. and enter an Offset value of 0 0. Scroll down to the Extents category. enter an Offset of 1' 0" For Bottom. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Draw) is selected. for Top. For Offset. Under View Depth. and click Edit for View Range. 8 In the Type Selector.

verify that New is selected. select Level 1 Plenum. For Upper Limit. 15 Use the mouse scroll wheel. This action specifies the vertical extent of the space. enter 0' 0" . 16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. The Space box contains all unplaced spaces (spaces that were placed in unbounded areas).Mech. double-click 1 . Verify that Leader is cleared. 17 Verify that Space Tag is selected in the Type Selector.Mech view is not maximized or the elevation view was closed. under Floor Plans. Place a space in an office area and in an open area 13 In the Project Browser. Verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. In the Space box.The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. the 1 . Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view. and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. click Space. 18 On the Options Bar. For Offset. If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable. 14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view. and maximize the window. The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs. New indicates that a new space is being placed. 80 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

and after the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown. You activate this visibility later in this exercise. 22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan. Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not activated. 21 With the Space tool open. click to place a space as shown. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click Zoom to Fit.20 Click to place the space. Placing Spaces | 81 . This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. Later in the exercise. TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area. you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there.

A text box appears.23 Click Modify. 82 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 25 Click the space tag name. 24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office. Next. you rename the 2 spaces.

30 Click OK. expand Spaces. The Interior option displays space shading. Open 104. 26 Double-click the space tag number. and click in the drawing area. and rename the space in the open area. enter VG on the keyboard.Enter Office. 29 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. You apply color fill to spaces in a later exercise. and Reference. 27 Repeat this method. and select Color Fill. Interior. enter 101 in the text box. 28 With the view active. The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view. Reference displays space reference lines (cross hairs). Placing Spaces | 83 . Next. you activate spaces visibility. Color Fill displays space color fill when it is applied. and press ENTER.

Place a space in the entrance area You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated and cooled more often than the rest of the open space. verify that 0' 0" is specified. you need to make this area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines. The entrance area is bound only by the radius wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. and click Mechanical. 84 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Chain. For Offset. To place a space in the entrance area. and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of the radius wall as shown. 31 With the 1 . enter ZR. and (Line) are selected.Mech view active. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Draw). NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Space Separation. 33 On the Options Bar. right-click the Design Bar. 32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

The Draw tool remains open. The space separation line created a new fully-bounded area within the large open area. Notice that the Open 104 space adjusted its boundaries so that it is not in the new area. select the space (reference line) or the space tag. 35 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom out the view. 40 Press ESC twice to close the Draw tool. 34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall. and drag it to the larger open area. and after the end point snap displays. Placing Spaces | 85 . click to specify the end point for the last line segment. click Move to Space. 37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 32' 0". and type 4' 0" (notice the text entry box called a dimension listener that pops up). 39 Move the cursor to the left 4' 0" (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall). 38 Draw the line down 32' 0". NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area. and click to specify the end point for the second line segment. and click to specify the end point of the third line segment. If the space and space tag are inside the new area. and after the end point snap displays. click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment. 36 Draw the line up. select and drag both of them. If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space.■ Verify that Radius is cleared. and press ENTER to specify the end point for the first line segment.

after the space reference lines highlight. After the areas are separated. enter 0 0 for Offset. click Space. 86 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . right-click and click Element Properties. For Name. 44 Click Modify. under Identity Data. Next. verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. enter Entrance. select Level 1 Plenum for Upper Limit. enter 121. do the following: ■ ■ For Number.NOTE Space separation lines are MEP-specific room-bounding lines that separate areas where a wall is not desired or not possible. and verify that New is slected in the Space box. 42 On the Options Bar. 41 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. spaces can be placed in them. space separation lines are not recognized in Revit Architecture. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 Place a space in the entrance area. you place a space in the entrance area. Although room separation lines are recognized in Revit MEP. 45 Place the cursor over the space. verify that Leader is cleared.

The space is renamed Entrance 121. and enter 2 0 for Offset. select Level 2 for Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 87 . expand Spaces. under Floor Plans. 49 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar. 51 Place a space in the chase area. 56 On the Options Bar. and click to place a space. 52 Press Esc. Chase 118. click Space. double-click Level 1 Plenum.47 Click OK. The offset places the space 2 feet above the roof. Notice that the plenum space is not in the mechanical room or in the stairwell. Place a space in a plenum area 54 In the Project Browser. 53 Rename the space. 58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active. select Roof for Upper Limit. Roof is specified for the upper limit because the chase area spans multiple levels and ends at the roof level. The plenum space displays in the floor plan view. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. 57 Place the cursor in the plenum area. and enter 0 0 for Offset. 55 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. click Space. and select Interior and Reference. Place a space in a chase area 48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room. This is because the walls prevent space placement. 60 Click OK.

However. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. that action removes the space from the Default zone. In this exercise. 88 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. click System Browser. and double-click 1 . In the next exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Finally. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. and click Save.61 If you want to save your work. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter Spaces Training for File name. you can choose to save your work. close the file. you modified the spaces visibility for the views. When you add a space to a zone.Mech to make it the active view. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you add spaces to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Zones After spaces are placed in the building. 62 In the Save As dialog. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. Otherwise. navigate to the folder of your choice. Zones allow you to control the spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You used space separation lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. NOTE After finishing each exercise. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Open the i Zones. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines.

NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. you assign spaces to a zone. Creating Zones | 89 . and a new zone is created. As you do this. The title bar displays the name of the new zone. and click View ➤ Zones. 7 In the drawing area. This is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. This removes the space from the Default zone. it is automatically added to the Default zone. place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space highlights. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. the Zone toolbar displays. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information. You work with one zone until you click Finish. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Assign a zone to spaces on the same level 5 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Zone. The Zone tool opens. 6 On the Zone toolbar. Using the Zone toolbar. After a space is placed in an area. 3 Right-click in Systems Browser. verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. and modify the zone properties. Next. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.

Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 11 With the Zone toolbar open. you need to activate the zone visibility which you do next. and click OK. The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. 90 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 9 With the drawing area active. expand HVAC Zones. expand the new zone and notice that the Office 101 space is added to it and removed from the Default zone. To view the zone in the drawing area. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Zone Properties).West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.West Offices. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. and click OK. 14 Expand the 1 . add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone. 12 On the Zone toolbar. TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Next. you rename the zone.8 Click the space to add it to the zone. In the System Browser. enter VG. under Identity Data. The new zone displays. 10 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. for Name enter 1 .

Mech floor plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 20 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Mech to make it the active view. you activate zones visibility for the view. 22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Next. 27 On the Zone toolbar. 23 On the Zone toolbar. expand HVAC Zones. 21 Zoom in on each floor plan. 19 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan: 1 . add the following level 1 spaces to the zone: Open 104 Men’s Room 105 Mech/Elec 106 Ladies Room 107. Creating Zones | 91 . 17 With the drawing area active. 26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active. and double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view. click Finish. 25 With the Zone toolbar open. 24 On the 1 . and click OK. click Finish. click Zone. enter VG.15 On the Zone toolbar. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. verify that ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. Assign a zone for spaces on different levels 16 In the Project Browser.

92 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 29 On the Options Bar. The Zone tool opens. Notice that the Zone toolbar displays the name of the zone that you are editing. click Edit Zone. 30 On the Zone toolbar. and click OK.Open Offices. and click Properties. However. under Identity Data. Next. select the reference line to the zone that you created. click (Zone Properties). for Name.You need to rename the zone. you cannot open the Zone tool as this will create a new zone. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser. 28 In either view. you edit the zone to rename it. enter 1 .

West Offices Stairwells 2 . Elec/Mech 206. 117 Offices 101. Men’s Room 205. close the file. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and Creating Zones | 93 . navigate to the folder of your choice.East Offices 2 .East Offices 1 .North Offices 2 . Ladies Room 207.South Offices 1 . proceed to the next step. The table below lists all spaces and the zones. 211. All zones will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog. 116. 109. 203 Chases 118. Elec/Mech 106.Conference Room 2 .Entrance 1 . Otherwise.Open Offices 1 . 112. L2 Plenum 217 Offices 215.The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. 110 Open 104.South Offices 2 . click Finish. 202. 119.West Offices Chases 34 If you want to save your work. use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in the building. 120 Zones 1 . Ladies’ Room 107.North Offices 1 . 212 Lounge 208. Complete the zones for the building 33 For additional practice. Men’s Room 105. You activated zone visibility in the views. In this exercise. Office 209 Open 204. 213 Conference 214 Offices 210. Make certain that you verify the spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser If you prefer not to continue with this practice. 32 On the Zone toolbar. 216 Offices 201. L1 Plenum 122 Offices 115. you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the building. You can expand the 1 .Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it. 113 Entrance 121 Offices 108. Spaces Offices 111.Open Offices 2 . 103 Stairwells 114. and click Save. 102. enter Zones Training for File name.

Verify that Schema 1 is selected for Color Scheme. and click to place the legend. Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. click Color Scheme Legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading. 6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. Click OK.Mech view. you assign a color scheme to these zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. 94 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. and double-click 1 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click the Design Bar.in the System Browser. The color scheme is applied to the zones in the 1 . 7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. The zones are also listed in the System Browser. In the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type. click the Training Files icon. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Mech to make it the active view. Apply the color scheme 5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected. NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you apply a color scheme to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. Open the i Zone Color Scheme. and click Drafting. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using space schedules or accessing element properties.

and click Save. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Level 1 Plenum. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name. enter 03101. NH for City. and zone information. For Postal Code.Mech. proceed to the next step. Specify Project Settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Office is specified for Building Type. In this exercise. 2 In the Element Properties dialog under Energy Analysis. 9 If you want to save your work. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. select Manchester. click Edit for Energy Data. click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and view the loads report. All color schemes will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis In this exercise. 10 In the Save As dialog. Open the i Energy Analysis. You then perform a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon.8 For additional practice. space. and view the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. you verify the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you prefer not to continue with this practice. navigate to the folder of your choice. and Level 2 Plenum floor plan views. use the method that you learned and add a color scheme for the zones on the 2 . ■ Click for Location. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 95 . and click OK.

and do the following: ■ ■ For Building Type. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Verify area and volume setting 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. Verify that New Construction is selected for Project Phase. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). verify that Office is selected. Then. if you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Building Construction. For Place and Location. verify that <Building> is selected. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Ground Plane. 96 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .Single Duct is selected. click Edit for Energy Data. Default Space Construction. verify that Manchester. 7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that VAV .Single Duct is specified for Building Service. and click OK. Verify that Shading surfaces is selected. You have verified the building information. IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Next. Verify that 1' 0" is specified for Sliver Space Tolerance. A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the building. select Level 1. NH is selected. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting).■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that VAV . (Building ■ ■ For Building Service (Default Space Service). you need to select this option. 5 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. Click OK twice. click Heating and Cooling Loads. Verify that <Building> is specified for Building Construction. under Energy Analysis. Verify building information 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

spin the model as shown. 12 Click (Highlight).East Offices zone. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 97 . and zoom the model to better view the space. The analytical volume is bounded by the center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors. and select Office 111. 11 Expand the 1 . The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The space for Office 111 highlights in red. you isolate a space.View a space 8 In the preview pane. TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin. The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. 13 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. 9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Next. verify that Wireframe is selected (default setting). click the Spaces/Zones tab. pan. NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space. 10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.

The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces that normally would be obstructed by other spaces or by the architecture which would normally make it difficult to view. Office 111. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its inner volume. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. 16 On the View Selector . roofs. you view the volume of the space differently. you verify space information. Next. the space information displays for the selected space. 98 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Below the list of spaces and zones. floors. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. 17 Using the methods that you learned. and other room-bounding components. click (Isolate). 15 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Verify space information 19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Office 111. 18 Next.14 With Office 111 selected. click Shading.

East Offices. N/A : N/A : N/A is specified for Outdoor Air Information. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. 23 As you did earlier. 70. click Wireframe. (Isolate) tools to view the analytical 24 Click (Shading). verify the following space information: ■ <Building> is specified for Space Type and Construction Type. cooling air temperature. This zone information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the spaces in the zone. This specified the number of people or the area per person for the space. use the (Highlight) and volume of the spaces in the selected zone. Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as space and zone properties. This displays the analytical volume of the spaces in the selected zone. you verify the zone information. and verify the space and zone information. 1 . and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the 1 -East Offices zone. right-clicking. and clicking Element Properties. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. including Office 111.00 °F : 90.East Offices zone: ■ ■ <Building> is specified for Service Type.00 °F : N/A for Heating Information. heating air temperature. You can also access the space and zone information by selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser. <Default> is specified for People Data. 22 On the Spaces/Zones tab.20 Under the list of spaces and zones. Next. This specifies the heating set point. select 1 . You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone information. 25 Click 1 . View other spaces and zones 27 Using the methods that you learned. and humidification set point. This specifies the outdoor air per person. Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data. outdoor air per area. and dehumidification set point. 74.00 °F : 54. This zone contains 3 spaces. 26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 .East Offices. the zone information displays for the selected zone.East Offices. respectively.00 °F : N/A for Cooling Information. This specifies the cooling set point. ■ ■ IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 99 . Below the list of spaces and zones. The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties dialog. view other spaces and zones in the building model. ■ ■ View a zone and zone information 21 On the View Selector . and air changes per hour.

space. For example. click Calculate. 100 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . pan. that information does not display. 31 In the Save As dialog. you can perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise. building. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. space. You must have IES <VE> installed. weather. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. or zoom the view to see the selected space or zone. space. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 28 On the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. navigate to the folder of your choice. the People Data option becomes blank. TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them. Various factors are analyzed including analytical and inner volumes of the spaces. and zone information for the building model. Now that the project. space. you verified building. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. or by pressing SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. This product is not included with Revit MEP. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. close the file.You may need to spin. NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information. and a loads report displays. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. click File menu ➤ Save. Otherwise. 30 If you want to save your work. this report includes project. or make any changes to the model. Revit MEP performs a heating and cooling loads analysis using the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool that was developed in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). and click Save. 29 Review the loads report. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. or zone information. In the next lesson. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. and zone information has been verified. You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and zone information. if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. or import the IES model that has already been created.

Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. and double-click 1 . you create new views.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In this lesson.Mechanical Systems:Air 4 Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You can also select the 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. Then. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. you will create supply air systems. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After completing the air systems lesson. and click View Properties. adding AC units. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. sizing ductwork. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. As you place the air terminals.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties).Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. modify air terminal parameters. After system creation. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. 101 . and then you validate your air system design. Open the i Air Terminals. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. Modify a ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

separate the value with a space. ■ ■ TIP When entering a value. For example. for the Top parameter. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. 5 In the View Range dialog. for the Cut plane parameter. do the following: ■ ■ Select Level 1 for Underlay. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. enter 0 for Offset.Ceiling Mech is the active view. Under View Depth. under Graphics. 11 Click to place the supply air terminal in the upper left office as shown. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You specify 8' 7" so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 8' 6") and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. NOTE The ceiling hosts the diffuser. and enter 8 7 for Offset. for the Level parameter.3 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. 9 In the Type Selector. make sure that Place on Face is selected. 102 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. Under Primary Range. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. 10 On the Options bar. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. and enter 8' 7" for Offset. click Air Terminal. select Supply Diffuser . 6 Click OK twice.

click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. Since snaps are not available here. You can also press Esc to accomplish this result. 14 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. 17 Move the air terminal to the location shown. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). the command in progress terminates. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. click to specify the move start point. and then click the midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. then select Multiple. you may have to move it to center it -. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 13 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile. and then click Modify. TIP When you click Modify. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. TIP To use the Move tool. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Placing Air Terminals | 103 .12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. click Modify.use the arrow keys for fine movement control. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. enter 300 CFM for Flow. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays.

Notice that after you specify the copy start point. listening dimensions display to aid placement. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method.Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. 22 In the Type Selector. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. click Air Terminal. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only. 104 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom).Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. select Exhaust Diffuser .

place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of the restrooms. Placing Air Terminals | 105 . select Return Diffuser .Before you copy the exhaust diffuser. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 250 CFM. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Using the same placement method.Hosted: Workplane-based Return Diffuser. and specify a 325 CFM airflow for each of them.

Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. and click Element Properties. and click OK. 106 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Mechanical.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. clear the UpArrow check box. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. right-click. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed.

32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1. create the level 2 supply system. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. After you place the supply air terminals. continue laying out the level 1 supply system. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. 30 Select the Office 101 air terminal.Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. Placing Air Terminals | 107 . 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. do the following for level 2: ■ Make 2 .Ceiling Mech the active view. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. Optional: Create the level 2 air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. click on the Edit toolbar.

and learned a method for precise placement. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. You will be using different views to design the systems. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. In the next exercise. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. specify the same view parameters as 1 . collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. 108 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click Save.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. click File menu ➤ Save. you create the air systems.■ In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. More importantly. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the next exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. and 250 CFM airflow for the exhaust diffusers. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Specify 325 CFM airflow for the supply and return diffusers. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. 33 If you want to save your work. modified the air terminal parameters. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. 34 In the Save As dialog. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. 4 Add Mark and System Type. 6 While pressing Ctrl. 10 In the Calculated Value dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. ■ ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available fields. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select Flow. Click OK. 8 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Number Space: Name Mark System Type Flow Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Select HVAC for Discipline. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Actual Calculated Airflow for Name. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow Space: Name Space: Number 7 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. 5 Under Select available fields from. select Space. select the field and click Remove. Create a calculated value parameter 9 Click Calculated Value. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 109 . do the following: ■ Under Category. Verify that Formula is selected. select Air Terminals.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.■ Open the i Air System Schedules. Select Air Flow for Type. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces.

and click Conditional Format. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. Select Blank line. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. equals. 11 Click OK. select System Type for Filter by. The red values in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 CFM. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. On the Filter tab. 110 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and select Supply Air. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. Enter -35 CFM and 35 CFM for Value. select Actual Calculated Airflow.Space: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. in the Fields list. and Count and totals. Organize the data 14 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. Verify that Ascending is selected. Select Footer. 13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog. Select Not Between for Test. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. Next. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. and Itemize every instance is selected. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information.■ Use the button on the right to enter Space: Actual Supply Airflow . This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Format the calculated value parameter 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ ■ The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule. A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Space: Number for Sort by. Use the schedule as a design tool 15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. Click OK twice.

This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. 16 In the Project Browser. and press Tab. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 111 . the selected air terminal displays in red. NOTE If a different project is also open. 20 Delete 300 CFM enter 250. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. select the 300 CFM Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air terminal. The Actual Calculated Airflow value displays in white indicating that it now complies with the Office 101 airflow design requirements. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. double-click 1 Mech to make it the active view. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. Tagging an Air Diffuser 21 Select Tag from the Mechanical tab on the Design bar. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. 24 Click on a diffuser to add a tag. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. 25 Modify the other supply air terminal Flow parameters for both floors so that the airflow design requirements are met. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. 19 In the schedule. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. rather than one by one in a drawing.This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. click Leader to clear this option. 22 Select By Category. 18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. speeds the design process. 23 On the Options bar. Optional: Modifying Other Parameters The drawing for the next exercise provides completed values. 17 Enter ZR.

you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. Unlike logical connections. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the i Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. During this exercise. and click Save. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in white. This is the power of BIM. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. you are changing the air terminal connector size. and double-click 1 . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. and maximize the 1 . you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. Under Primary Range. After you modify the airflow parameters. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. and then create the logical connection between the system components. 112 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . However. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. After creating the logical connection. click Edit for View Range. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the View Range dialog.Mech to make it the active view.Mech floor plan view. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. you create air systems. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. 28 In the Save As dialog. for the Top parameter. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 27 If you want to save your work. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. In this exercise. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. click File menu ➤ Save. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. click the Training Files icon. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. enter an Offset value of 10 0. navigate to the folder of your choice. 26 Close the schedule view.NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow.

and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. 7 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides window.5 Click OK twice. enter ZR. 10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. air terminals. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 11 With the view active. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems.Mech view. if all system components are assigned. and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. uncheck Air Terminal tags. So. For now. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. Explore the System Browser 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. after you placed the diffusers. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. click in the drawing area to make it active. 9 If the System Browser title says Zones. This assignment occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. click System Browser. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. 6 Type VG on the keyboard. If the System Browser does not respond. and click OK. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems. As you assign diffusers to systems. then press F9. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. Thus. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 113 . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.

you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector. select VAV Unit . do the following: ■ Under Constraints. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. and click Element Properties. Note that the VAV will detect the downstream airflow when connected to diffusers. 114 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. Click OK. You created a system that includes the air terminal.TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. ■ The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). you add the VAV to this system. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. and press Esc twice. 14 Move the cursor to the right of the office door. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. click (Select Equipment for System). If desired.Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 . Modify VAV box parameters 15 Right-click the VAV box. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. system specific tools display on the Options Bar.8 inch Inlet. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. Next. This VAV box services only Office 101 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. 12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click to place the VAV box. click (Create Supply Air System). enter 9 6 for Offset. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 17 Select the Office 101 rectangular diffuser. and select the VAV box.

select an air terminal that you added to the system. The organization is from upstream. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. Create the ductwork 20 With the new system selected. and click Select to select the system. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. place the cursor over the Office 101 air terminal and press Tab. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. and cleared from the Options Bar. This display indicates that the new system is selected. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. and select the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 115 . The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. They remain assign to their respective default systems.Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool.

26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. click Settings. 25 Under System Type: Supply Air. select Branch. 23 On the Options Bar.Round for Flex Duct Type. Verify that 6' 0" is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 27 Under System Type: Supply Air. click Finish Layout. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 21 On the Options Bar. For more information. 24 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. select Main. Notice that Solutions is selected. refer to Help.The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. and select solution 2. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. do the following: 22 ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. ■ Click (Next Solution). 116 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 28 Click OK.

as was the elbow itself. Check duct connectivity 31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. For example. For example. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. On the View Control Bar. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. thus it is not part of the system. select Coarse detail level for single line. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct.The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. Change the geometry display 30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. select Medium for Detail Level. and press Tab twice. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 117 . TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added.

The first time you press Tab. fittings. under Sizing Method. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. Verify that Only is selected. 33 On the Options Bar. Size the duct 32 Place the cursor over the duct.08 in-wg/100ft. then you know that a disconnection exists. Click OK. and enter . and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. 34 In the Duct Sizing dialog. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. If the entire network does not highlight. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 118 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Rerouting usually correct this issue. and click to select them.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. and equipment. ■ The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . Under Constraints. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. click Sizing.

Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 37 Click in the drawing area. 36 Click Cancel. double-click the second VAV box listed. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 119 . You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. 39 In the Type Selector. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. select VAV Unit . and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the offices immediately below Office 101). It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and click Element Properties.8 inch Inlet. the required airflow for the space and the airflow assigned to the diffusers. 40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door. right-click and select Element Properties. 41 In the left column of the System Browser. Note that the airflow is set to 250 CFM . and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to place the VAV box. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. click Mechanical Equipment. 38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter ZR.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 .IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 35 With the VAV selected.

the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. 46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. enter 9' 6" for Offset. right-click. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. This system includes the selected system component(s). and click Select from the context menu. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. The component highlights in the drawing area. click Add To System. and number of elements in the active being edited. NOTE After you select a system component. under Constraints.IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. a new system is immediately created. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. 44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. 43 Select the Office 102 rectangular diffuser. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. If not. and click OK. 45 Click (Edit System). 47 Place the cursor over the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. 120 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. system equipment. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. right-click the component in the left column. TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser.

The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 121 . the number of elements has increased to 2. 52 Select the VAV box. On the Options Bar.48 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. click (Select Equipment). 49 Select the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. 51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102.

54 Place your cursor over the Office 102 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system.On the Options Bar. 55 Click to select the system. click Finish. If you leave the mouse stationary. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. 122 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The system displays in red. 53 On the Edit System toolbar.

Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. 58 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. 57 On the Options Bar.Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 56 On the Options Bar. 59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and select solution 3. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Finish Layout. click Layout Path. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 123 . verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning.

Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. 124 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. If a warning occurs. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. click to place the endcap. So. and after the end point snap displays. 61 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. You can either relocate the VAV box. or modify the duct manually. you can review it and take action if necessary. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. Add an endcap 60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. 62 In the Type Selector. IMPORTANT When creating layouts. 63 Move the cursor over the end of the main. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. click Duct Fitting. This was the reason for the warning message.

click Sizing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Size the duct 67 Place the cursor over the duct.Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement.08 in-wg/100ft. right-click and select Element Properties. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. 68 On the Options Bar. and enter . Under Constraints. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 125 . and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM. 65 With the VAV selected. and click to select them. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. Verify that Only is selected. 69 In the Duct Sizing dialog. under Sizing Method. 66 Click Cancel. Click OK. 64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 102 and 103 is sized using the Friction method at . 126 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Check duct connectivity 70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. The VAV box. and press Tab twice. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. air terminals.

However. 74 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space).Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . and click to place the VAV box. click Mechanical Equipment. click Zoom in Region from the context menu.8 inch Inlet. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 127 . 72 In the 1 .Mech view. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 71 Right-click in the drawing area. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. 76 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. 73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. 75 In the Type Selector. select VAV Unit.Next.

128 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . under Constraints. 78 Select the VAV. select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV. and on the Options Bar. click (Create Air Supply System). and click again to deselect the VAV.77 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 81 On the Options Bar. The new supply air system displays in red. You will add this later. 80 While pressing CTRL. The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled). click (Element Properties). and click OK. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. enter 9' 6" for Offset. 79 In the Element Properties dialog.

The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 129 . 85 On the Options Bar. Then. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. Click . 83 Select the VAV to add it to the system. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. click Modify. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. You have logically connected the air system components. Next. 82 On the Options Bar. click to select the system. ■ 86 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 84 With the system selected.The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. and select solution 1. and press TAB once to highlight the system. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. and the red system display cleared. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. click (Select Equipment for System). Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected.

After you select the branch. select the left section of the branch. click Finish Layout.87 In the drawing area. 130 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. 90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. notice that drag controls display. and then snap and move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV. 89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch.

IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. Next. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 131 . The new system component is now part of the same system. click Add to System. 95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. 93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. Notice that on the Options Bar. click Finish. The system components are now physically connected. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. This number verifies the added diffuser. A change has occurred in the air system design. select a system component that is already part of a system. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. 94 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. 96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. the Number of Elements increased to 5. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 91 Select the main duct. Then. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu.The ductwork is created. 92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. and (Edit) on the Options Bar. VAV. mechanical equipment.

Check duct connectivity 103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and select solution 1. 101 On the Options Bar. click Finish Layout. select the flex duct and the transition on the diffuser. and working from the end of the main. ■ 102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.97 While pressing CTRL. 132 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you need to check that all the parts are connected. right-click and select Delete to remove the unwanted duct work. The new ductwork is created. Now that the duct work is in place. 99 Zoom out the view. Click . and press Tab twice. 100 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 98 With the duct work selected. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar.

click Sizing. The selection displays in red. Under Constraints. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 133 . TIP Depending on your ductwork layout.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. under Sizing Method.08 in-wg/100ft. and enter . and click to select them. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. Verify that Only is selected. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Size the duct 104 Place the cursor over the main duct. 105 On the Options Bar. Click OK. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. 106 In the Duct Sizing dialog.

an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. or reinsert duct fittings. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. 134 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. ■ ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. 108 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. If you receive errors. So.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. Next. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. under Mechanical. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at 0. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. If you receive errors. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. modify the duct manually. Do not change the duct conversion settings. Reposition and rotate if necessary. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit .) 107 In the Project Browser. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. Optional: Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems (See the next exercise for a completed drawing. You can either relocate the VAV box.This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at .08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. modify the layout. Verify that all Other options are cleared. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . double-click 1 . see the note below. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. see the note below.

Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system.The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. specify the air terminal airflow.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. Do not change the duct conversion settings. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 10' 0" and the Detail Level to Medium.Mech mechanical floor plan view. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. see the note above. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . If you receive errors.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. For VAV airflow. see the note above. turn off Air Terminal tags. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. Next. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 135 . Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. If you receive errors. Optional: Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 109 Use the 2 . Size the duct using the Friction method at 0. Verify that all Other options are cleared. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. 110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing.

enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. 112 If you want to save your work. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. You also specified VAV airflow. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. and click Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. checked duct connectivity. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. navigate to the folder of your choice.The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. In the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 136 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Open the i Using Views for Duct Validation. click File menu ➤ Save. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. In this exercise. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 1 . sized the ductwork.Mech to make it the active view. 113 In the Save As dialog. Although you already checked duct connectivity. After creating each system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and validated the systems in the System Browser.

select HVAC for Sub Discipline. The section relocates under HVAC. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. 8 In the drawing area. under Graphics. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 103. and click Properties. After you add the section. and the second click specifies the section tail. 6 In the Project Browser. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. enter ZR. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. and click Zoom to Fit. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 137 . The selected section displays in red. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end point. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. The first click specifies the section head. click the section. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. right-click Section 1. click Section. and click OK. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. 12 On the View Control Bar. The section head displays in blue. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. 138 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . similar to the level heads in the elevation view. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and 103.You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. select Medium for Detail Level.

under Extents. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. 18 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click Modify. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties.14 Continue to validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. select Section Box. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. A section box displays around the building model. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. 17 In the Project Browser. Notice that in the 3D view. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 139 . select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them.

25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. 24 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that you can verify that the Office 101. 26 If you want to save your work. and 103 duct geometry is as you expected. click File menu ➤ Save. 102. 140 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 21 In the drawing area. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle.NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed.

Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. 2 Enter ZR.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. and click to specify the start point. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. click Duct. and click Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the next exercise. and double-click 1 . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 141 . 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown. click the Training Files icon. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Open the i Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. navigate to the folder of your choice. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. select Round Duct : Taps. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. ■ ■ ■ Verify that 12" is selected for diameter (D:). you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name.27 In the Save As dialog. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. do the following.Mech to make it the active view.

and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101. you can select individual segments and use the arrow keys to adjust location. and click Draw Duct. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 8 Enter ZR. 142 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 9 Click on the VAV. right-click on the air connection. After placing the duct.7 Draw duct as shown in the following image.

10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. a tooltip appears confirming the connector.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. When drawing duct. 12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 8' 0" vertical second duct segment. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 143 . You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 8" VAV primary connector diameter. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and click to specify the end point. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. 11 Draw the first duct segment 2' 0" to the right. TIP When drawing duct. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. and click or press Enter to specify the end point. If you pause briefly.

the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the primary is complete. 14 With the Draw tool open.13 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. 144 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. After you click to specify the end point. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102.

click to specify the start point. 17 Connect the other three VAVs to the primary duct as shown. 16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 145 . You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. zoom the view to the right of the primary. and after the connector snap displays. On the View Control Bar. 18 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. Check connectivity 19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown.

and Angle is cleared. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. Finally. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. 20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Check connectivity. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. You will size the primary in a later exercise. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". Optional: Complete the level 1 primary duct (See next exercise for a completed drawing. Do not size the primary. but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. you will do that in a later exercise. 22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry.) 21 In the Project Browser. specify a 9' 6" offset.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. 146 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

Do not size the primary. and double-click 2 . and Angle is cleared. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. ■ ■ Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 147 . 24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. Check connectivity. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. You will size the primary in a later exercise. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". On the Options Bar. Optional: Draw the level 2 primary duct 23 In the Project Browser.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. specify a 9' 6" offset.Mech to make it the active view. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps.

click File menu ➤ Save. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. Open the i Duct Sizing . 25 If you want to save your work. 26 In the Save As dialog. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. 148 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. but you have yet to size the primary. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. In the next exercise. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. However.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Before sizing the primary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. Finally.Velocity. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. In this exercise. While drawing duct. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. This determines the airflow direction.

The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. and click Mechanical. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. 4 In the Type Selector.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. right-click the Design Bar. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click to place the endcap. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and 116. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 1 . 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Duct Fitting. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. and after the end point snap displays. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 149 .Mech to make it the active view.

Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. ■ 150 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click Sizing. The selected primary displays in red. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. and enter 2500 FPM. and click to select it.Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. Under Constraints. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Verify that Only is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. under Sizing Method.

IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. So. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. modify the duct manually. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. You can either relocate the VAV box. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 151 . and press TAB twice. or reinsert duct fittings. modify the layout. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Next.The sized left primary is shown below.

18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct.) 15 In the Project Browser. The sized right primary is shown below.Mech to make it the active view. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. 152 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.13 Using the process that you just learned. 14 Using the method you have learned. the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. As in level 1. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. and double-click 2 . Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run (See the next exercise for a completed dawing. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run.

2 In the Project Browser.Velocity Training for File name. Like room color scheme. enter Duct Sizing . you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. and click Save.Mech. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 153 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 If you want to save your work.Mech Duct Classes for Name.The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. you sized the primary duct for the building. click File menu ➤ Save. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Mech. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. 20 In the Save As dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In the next exercise. enter 1 . In this exercise. Then. and click OK. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. and click Rename. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. Open the i Duct Color Scheme. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Mech is created and becomes the active view. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. right-click Copy of 1 . navigate to the folder of your choice. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. right-click 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. First.

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical. 5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 2000 FPM. In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter high velocity for the second row. In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

154 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Click OK.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. Using the same color scheme allows you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 155

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder. TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

156 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show. The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. 5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Split).

7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main about 11' 0" from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 157

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:
■ ■

Select Equal Friction, and enter 0.08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

158 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag. TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First, you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 159

sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select

(Inspect).

The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

160 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected to this system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment.

Inspecting Air Systems | 161

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units
In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units.

162 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view 1 Click the View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 2 Select Roof and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Roof. 4 Right-click Roof, and click Rename. 5 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK. 6 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Ignore the warning about the name changing. 7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK twice. 10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe. 11 Set the Detail Level to Medium. This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 13 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 14 In the Type Selector, select Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 163

15 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 16 Place the unit in the approximate location shown below.

17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. Create a new section view 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 20 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 203 VAV box, and click to specify the section start point.

21 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

164 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 24 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 25 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 26 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 27 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. You may need to adjust the top border to see all of the AC unit.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 165

29 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must relocate it.

30 Select the AC unit, and click

(Move) on the Edit toolbar.

31 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.

32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface, (1' 0" directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

166 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 1' 0" which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. Place the level 1 AC unit 33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):

Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 167

Completing the Supply Air Systems
In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make the view active. 2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it displays as shown below.

168 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 6 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 7 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 9 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 10 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection, the connector snap displays.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 169

11 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 12 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Enter 68" for W: (width), and 20" for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -2 6 for Offset, and press Tab.

■ ■

The -2' 6" offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 9' 6". Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 3' 6" and press Enter to specify the end point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 9' 6" from level 2, and then the duct continues horizontally for 3' 6".

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 14 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

170 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

16 Close the Roof Mech view. You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 17 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 18 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 171

19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining elbow. The selected items display in red. 21 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 23 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps. 24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter), select 9". Verify that Auto connect is selected. For Offset, verify that 9' 6" is specified.

25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the start point.

172 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

27 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. click to specify the end point. and after the centerline snap displays.26 Move the cursor over the primary. 28 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 173 . The left primary is connected to the AC unit.

and place the cursor over the end connector. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. 174 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 30 In the 2 . 32 Drag the connector down and to the right. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. 29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection.Next. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement.Mech view. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment. 31 Select the right primary duct.

33 Select the right primary duct. 35 With the draw tool still active. 34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint. 37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. right-click and select Draw Duct. draw a horizontal run and connect it to the midpoint snap of the riser . 36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 175 .

Add endcaps 39 In the 2 . select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. However.Mech view. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice. 40 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar.Mech view. 176 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 41 In the Type Selector. The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. click Duct Fitting. zoom in on the duct riser. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. Check connectivity 38 In the 2 .You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit.

43 With the Duct Fitting tool open. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard.. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. 44 In the Type Selector.Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 177 . click to add the endcap. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. 42 Place your cursor over the top edge.

46 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. verify the duct riser endcap. click to add the endcap. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. and then validate its geometry. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. 48 In the 3D view. Verify endcap placement 47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement.45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. 178 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 49 Using the 2 views.

51 With the 2 views tiled. and click OK. 52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. and then select Mechanical Equipment. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. click Check None. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. click in the 2 . You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view.50 Press Tab to check connectivity. Create the high pressure supply air system. Next. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.Mech view to make it active. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. 54 In the Filter dialog. 53 On the Options Bar. Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of Completing the Supply Air Systems | 179 . This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2.

These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the selected VAV boxes to it. or even without ductwork. However. and select the level 2 AC unit.the current view are selected. 180 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. all system components must be logically connected by a system.Mech view range. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. 55 On the Options Bar. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. 57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. In this case. 56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 .

65 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. duct fitting. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. Supply Air. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 181 . 62 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 25 to view the VAV boxes. 68 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct.Mech drawing area to make the view active. diffuser. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. expand Mechanical.Validate the primary supply air system 59 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 66 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. you inspect the system. The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. Inspect the primary supply air system 64 In the System Browser. click Inspect. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. and click Select.Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 25 system listing. 60 In the System Browser. 61 Expand Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. 67 Click a blank space in the 2 . 63 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. click Inspect. In the Unassigned folder. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. and click Inspect. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. Next. 69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. The System Inspector tool opens. This is the system that you just created.

Next. 182 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. 9' 6". draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 68" width. and a 20" height. and enter 3' 6". Click the supply connector. This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. move the cursor down. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air system 72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view. Specify the offset to -14' 6". ■ ■ This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit.70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar.

and after the edge highlights. In the 1 .Mech view. and tile it to the left of the 3D view.Mech view (if open). open the 1 . select the left primary duct segment. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . release the mouse button. Watch for the centerline snap as shown. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 183 .Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. ■ ■ Connect the primary to the AC. Instead of drawing duct.Mech view. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge.

Use Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. and inspect the system with the System Inspector. Validate the system using the System Browser. ■ In the 1 . and remember to zoom the view. ■ 184 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. Use Tab to check duct connectivity.Mech view. ■ ■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system.

and click Save. click the Training Files icon. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. you check the systems in your project. and validated these logical connections.The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. As you view the warnings. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. 74 In the Save As dialog. 73 If you want to save your work. Revit MEP lists the system components Checking Air Systems | 185 . Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you need to validate them. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. In this exercise. and for duct sizing. In the next exercise. In this exercise. click Check Duct Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. Using tiled windows. Open the i Checking Air Systems. and quickly target those systems that need attention. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save.

If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. 186 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and for duct sizing. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design.that are associated with each warning. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. For example. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. as a tutorial exercise. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 5 Right-click Default Return Air. thus assigning the components to a system. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. the duct is now associated with that system. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. After you assign the system components to a system. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. So. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. In the System Browser. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. However. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. Then. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems.

you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. 6 Using the same methods. Depending on your air systems design. You now confirm the systems that you created. In the next lesson. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. and click Save. In this exercise. and click Select to view it and its assigned system components. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. otherwise click Close. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. 10 If you want to save your work. 11 In the Save As dialog. 8 Right-click Supply Air. Checking Air Systems | 187 . TIP If you have multiple views open. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. 9 Right-click a system. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment.The red lines represent the default logical connection. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. click File menu ➤ Save. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system.

188 .

Creating Piping Views In this exercise. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. 189 . After completing the air systems lesson. pipes. right-click 2 . you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process.Mech.Mechanical Systems: Piping 5 Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. a boiler. click the Training Files icon. A new view called Copy of 2 . circulator pump. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. placing a circulator pump. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. you create new views in which to design the piping system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and inspecting the piping system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Open the i Creating Piping Views. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you create hydronic piping systems. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. and the systems to logically connect the system components. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. First. Then.Mech is created and becomes the active view.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In this lesson. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

Mech.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. Under View Depth. and click OK. The 2 .Piping view selected in the Project Browser. Next. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. and enter -11 6 for Offset. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. 190 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . do the following: ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. right-click Copy of 2 . 8 Click OK twice. TIP When entering a value. For example. enter 2 . Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . you do not need to type measurement symbols. for Level. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. Enter -3 1 for Cut plane Offset. and enter -11' 6" for Offset. and click Edit for View Range. you change the view range. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". just separate the value with a space. 7 In the View Range dialog. and click Rename. Also notice that 2 . and enter 1' 0" for Offset. scroll down to the Extents category.Piping for Name. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". 5 In the Element Properties dialog.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog.2 In the Project Browser. For Bottom. click view properties. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. under Graphics.

IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). Create and define filters 9 In the 2 . Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. To do this. Considering this. type name. Verify that none is selected for And. such as family name. Creating Piping Views | 191 . You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. or even a description that you define. and enter VG.Piping view. Click Apply. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. under Filters. it will be best to create filters. and click OK. however. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. 10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. the system filters are not used. Select VAV Unit . click in the drawing area to make the view active. 12 In the Filters dialog.Parallel Fan Powered for the family name. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. and verify that equals is selected. system type. On the Filters tab. you can add and activate filters. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. In this lesson. 11 Click Edit/New. they will not filter all system elements needed. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. you need a define common filter criteria. you may want to select each component type separately. (New).You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. click 13 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. Depending on the filter criteria. select Mechanical Equipment. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. So. 15 Under Filter Rules. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. However. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. However. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. click the Filters tab. 14 Under Categories.

and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. 20 Enter Air Terminal for the description. under Identity Data. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Properties). 22 In the Type Selector. 32 Click in the 2 . return. you create a description as the common filter criteria. select Exhaust Diffuser Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. Next. select Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. This is the same rule for using formulae.Piping view to make it active. select Description for Filter by. For Type. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Remember to click Apply. 192 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and verify that equals is selected. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. 21 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. click in the Value column for Description. you continue to create and define the filters. 31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. click 17 Enter Air Terminals for Name. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. click Air Terminal.16 In the Filters dialog. if differences exist in the selected elements. you can select it. 28 Under Identity Data. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. 23 On the Options Bar. So. you must spell both verbatim. 30 Click OK twice. enter Air Terminal for Description. 29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. otherwise the filter will not work. and click OK twice. then the type parameters will not display. return. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. Remember. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. 18 Under Categories. This action adds a description for all Exhaust Diffuser air terminals. and click Apply. under Filters.Hosted. . you add a description for the supply air diffusers. you will not see the Description type parameter. By selecting each air terminal type separately. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. select Supply Diffuser . and click OK. This is because the selected supply. 19 Under Filter Rules. and select Air Terminal. and enter VG. Because you already entered the description. Next. Next. 26 Click Apply. click Edit/New. click Air Terminals.

and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. Category: Ducts. verify that equals is selected. clear all check boxes except for Mechanical . Filter by: System Type. Category: Flex Ducts. Category: Ducts. Round Ducts. 39 Under Visibility. You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. Filter by: Family Name. and select Round Duct for the family name. So. 38 In the Add Filters dialog. Filter by: Family Name.Round. 40 Click OK twice. 34 On the Filters tab.Supply and Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. verify that equals is selected. So.33 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. verify that equals is selected. click Add. and click OK. If you did not click Apply. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. And: Type Name. Next. you specify a family and a type name. click Edit/New. You used this duct to create the duct riser. Filter by: Family Name. Flex Ducts . and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. And: Type Name. Add and activate filters 37 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. Filter by: Family Name. verify that equals is selected. you filter duct fittings by system type. and enter Supply Air for system type name. 36 Click OK. you need to define the filter again. To filter multiple duct fitting types. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. verify that equals is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. verify that equals is selected. create the following new filters according to the specifications. Category: Duct Fittings. Creating Piping Views | 193 . Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler.Duct Fittings. you activate the filters. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. 35 Using the methods that you just learned. you add and activate the filters. you need a common filter criteria. Category: Ducts. select all of the filters that you created. This is because you have not added them. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . verify that equals is selected. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. Next. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. Next. click the Filters tab.

Unlike the 2 . you change the view range. 42 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. and click Edit for View Range.Mech is created and becomes the active view. Create the level 1 piping view 41 In the Project Browser.Mech. 47 In the View Range dialog. right-click Copy of 1 . under Graphics.Piping for Name. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 10' 0" is specified for Top Offset.Piping view displays the new view settings. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. The 1 . The 10 foot top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except 194 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 46 In the Element Properties dialog. You now define the view properties.Mech. scroll down to the Extents category. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. 44 Right-click in the drawing area. right-click 1 . TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden.Piping view. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 43 Enter 1 . and click Rename. Next. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level.All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. Next. under Primary Range. 48 Click OK twice. A new view called Copy of 1 .

As you create the pipe runs. If you turn off ducts visibility. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. You used this duct to create the duct riser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. and click OK. 58 Click OK. click Add. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. you will want to validate the geometry. clear Section Box to turn it off. under Graphics. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. 56 In the Add Filters dialog. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. you will be unable to view the duct riser. 50 In the Project Browser. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. and click View Properties. under Extents. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. right-click 3D. 59 In the Element Properties dialog. and to create the level 1 piping system. 57 Under Visibility. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. 51 Enter 3D Piping for Name. 55 On the Filters tab. Create the 3D Piping view 49 In the Project Browser. ducts. Creating Piping Views | 195 . click the Filters tab. and click OK. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. Next. 52 Right-click in the drawing area. select all of the filters that you created.for the boiler pipe connection). such as halftone architecture. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename.

In this exercise. select Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : 1" NPT. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 2 . navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name.Piping to make it the active view. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. In the next exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. 5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. you place the radiators and a boiler. click Mechanical Equipment. click the Training Files icon. You also created filters to display certain system components. 4 In the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser. 62 In the Save As dialog. right-click the Design Bar. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. Open the i Placing Radiators and Boiler. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. 61 If you want to save your work. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. 196 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and click Piping.60 Click OK.

7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. To place the radiator precisely under the window. except for the windows on the radius wall. 8 Click to place the radiator. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. select it and use the arrow keys to move it into position. and notice that the connectors display. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 197 .

Next. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. 14 Enter 4 for Flow. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. then these are different across the selected objects. double-click 1 .You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. All level 2 radiators display in red. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. for Flow. you place the boiler. If so. 12 On the Options Bar. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. verify that 20 GPM is specified for all of the selected radiators. 13 In the resulting dialog. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 4 GPM for all fin-tube radiators in the building. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. you modify the radiator flow rate. If the same type of component exists on another level. If parameters are blank. 198 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. and click Select All Instances. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. and you do not want to include it. Next. under Mechanical Loads. drag the section tail.Piping to make this the active view. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. click (Element Properties). Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. and click OK. right-click a radiator.

you verify the boiler flow rate. Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. click Mechanical Equipment. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. Next. watch the listening dimensions.16 Enter ZR. and select Boiler : Standard from the Type Selector. and click to place the boiler approximately as shown. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 199 . and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room.

You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 23 If you want to save your work. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. Open the i Creating Piping Systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. and click Element Properties. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. you create the supply and return piping systems. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. After creating the logical connection. Unlike logical connections (systems). Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar.20 In the drawing area. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. 22 Click OK. click File menu ➤ Save. then press F9.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Save. analyses cannot be performed. If the System Browser does not respond. navigate to the folder of your choice. During this exercise.Piping to make it the active view. In this exercise. click in the drawing area to make it active. right-click the boiler. and then create the logical connection between these system components. 200 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. 1 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. click System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. verify that 230 GPM is set for Max Flow. under Type Parameters. and double-click 2 . 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.

This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. if all system components are assigned.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and select the boiler to assign Creating the Piping Systems | 201 . right-click. 6 On the Options Bar. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. click it to the supply system. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. As you assign radiators to systems. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. Thus. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. 7 On the Options Bar. after you placed the radiators and boiler. and click Select All Instances. All level 2 radiators display in red. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. So. (Select Equipment for System). and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. Notice that after you click . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.

Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. and select the system. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. The organization is from upstream. you create the return piping system. all other components are unavailable. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Next. Thus.TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. Notice that you can select only valid system components. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. and click Select to select the system. 202 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . This display indicates that the new system is selected. press Tab. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler.

9 On the Options Bar.Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. So. 11 The return system displays in red. Creating the Piping Systems | 203 . Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. and cleared from the Options Bar. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). These listings represent the systems that you just created. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. 13 Right-click each category. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. and select the boiler to assign TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. expand Piping. Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. (Select Equipment for System). right-click. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. click it to the return system.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 17 If you want to save your work. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. click the Training Files icon. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. and click Select. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. navigate to the folder of your choice. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. click File menu ➤ Save. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections.Piping to make it the active view. In this exercise. in the next exercise. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. 204 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. 18 In the Save As dialog. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the i Creating Pipe Runs. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In a later exercise.15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. or even without pipe being drawn. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. and double-click 2 . you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. Now that you logically connected the piping system components.

click Check None. and click OK. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. click Layout Path. 5 On the Options Bar. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. you can place the cursor over a radiator. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). Creating Pipe Runs | 205 .Piping view range highlight. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. 4 In the Filter dialog. Then. 3 On the Options Bar.Piping view). click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. and then select Mechanical Equipment. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 .Notice that all components that are in the 2 . Notice that the radiators. the boiler.

and select solution 4 of 4. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. You will need to select a system to create the layout. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 6 In the Select a System dialog.IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. ■ 206 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . ■ Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. verify that Solutions is selected. select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. ■ Click (Next Solution). The system displays in red. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. then the Select a System dialog will open. Enter 1 0 for Inset. 7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. It does not reference the architecture.

refer to Help. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. 11 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. 10 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Using this inset. 14 Click OK. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. 12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 10' 9" in the level 1 plenum space. For more information. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. duct. you create the supply pipe run 1 foot from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). select Branch. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. 9 On the Options Bar. you now modify the layout path. Enter -1' 3" for Offset. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). Enter -1 3 for Offset. Creating Pipe Runs | 207 . Later in this exercise. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path.The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. Next. or architecture. and other obstacles. structural beams. verify that Main is selected. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. click Settings.

A drag control displays. 17 Using the drag control. 208 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout path. click Modify. The layout path is located under the radiators.Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 15 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. zoom the view. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. 16 In the drawing area.

19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings Creating Pipe Runs | 209 .18 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise.

and is not part of the system. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created.are automatically inserted. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. For example. or offset elevations are incorrect. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. 210 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. Change the geometry display 20 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 201.

To turn off hidden lines. If a pipe is hidden by an object. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. This is caused by the hidden line setting. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. 21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). select Fine for Detail Level. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap.Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. 22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). Creating Pipe Runs | 211 .

and click to select them. So. Medium for 2-line duct display. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 1 inch diameter. select Coarse for single line display. 25 Press Delete to delete the selection. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. The design requires 2 zones. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. On the View Control Bar. Instead of moving the pipe. Modify the pipe run 23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run.TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. 212 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. 24 Place the cursor over the pipe. Next. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. Additionally. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings.

27 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe).Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. Next. and click to select it. the logical connection (or system) is still intact. and click Modify on the Design Bar. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. you modify the supply pipe run diameter. If the pipes had different diameters. 26 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. width. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 1" indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). The diameter of the main and branches change to 1 inch. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. select 1" for D: (diameter). the diameter Creating Pipe Runs | 213 . 30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. 28 On the Options Bar.

or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe.would not display. press Tab 3 times. Next. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. If the entire network does not highlight. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. fittings. 32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. The first time you press Tab. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. Check connectivity 31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. then you know that a disconnect exists. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. and equipment. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 214 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

Piping view. and enter -1' 9" for both the main and branch offsets. Select Perimeter solution 4. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. This allows you to better see disconnects. Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. For pipe conversion settings. Next. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Create the level 2 return pipe run 34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. This places the pipes at a 10' 3" elevation in the level 1 plenum space. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. 33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. you create the return pipe run. Creating Pipe Runs | 215 . Enter 2' 0" for Inset. you can click to select them.

Remember. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. 216 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 1". 35 If you want to save your work. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. 36 In the Save As dialog. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. click File menu ➤ Save.■ In the Layout Path tool. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. 1 In the Project Browser. Resolving Pipe Interference | 217 . You checked connectivity. corrected disconnects. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. converted fittings. In the next exercise. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. and double-click 2 . and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. click the Training Files icon.Piping to make it the active view. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. Open the i Resolving Pipe Interference. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise.In this exercise. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs.

click Zoom in Region. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. 218 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. After you add the section. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the section head location. click Section. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. The first click specifies the section head.Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. and the second click specifies the section tail.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 219 . 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.A new section view named Section 3 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. click Modify.

and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. and click OK. The section relocates under Piping. 11 On the View Control Bar. 220 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .The section head and tail display. under Graphics. 8 In the Project Browser. select Piping for Sub Discipline. right-click Section 3. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 3 view. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. and click Properties. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select Fine for Detail Level. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 221 . 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. mechanical equipment placement. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. and after the connectors display. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 .Piping to make it the active view. and other aspects of your systems design. place the cursor over the top connector. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. Next. These connectors connect to the tee fittings.

fittings. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. 21 On the Edit toolbar. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. release the mouse button to reconnect it. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. and select the return pipe segment again. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. 222 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and click to split the pipe approximately as shown. you split the supply pipe segment. NOTE When modifying pipe. 19 Zoom out. always connect to pipe segments. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. Next. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to the area outside the stairwell as shown. and after the fitting end point snap displays. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. click (Split).18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. If you split the pipe.

and draw the pipe around the stairs. 24 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 26 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. you convert a tee fitting. Next. Resolving Pipe Interference | 223 . Zoom out the view. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. and press Delete to delete it. 25 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted.

The new tee has a horizontal. 31 In the Type Selector.27 Select the tee. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. right-click and select Delete. orientation. 33 Zoom out the view. and move the cursor to the left. 32 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. and then select the two adjacent pipes to add an elbow. 30 Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. and then click Modify. 29 Select the elbow and click on the upper plus (+) sign to convert the elbow to a tee. not vertical. and after the end point connector snap displays. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 224 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 28 Select Trim.

click to specify the segment end point. Resolving Pipe Interference | 225 . and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. NOTE When drawing pipe. and after the connector snap displays. 36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment.34 Draw the pipe 12’ 0" to the left outside the stairwell. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. 35 Draw the pipe down. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry.

The return pipe run is connected as shown. 38 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. 39 Right-click the lower connector. 226 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 37 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool.

The amount of movement that these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor. use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. 41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.This activates the Draw tool. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. 40 In the Type Selector. The section displays in red. Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 42 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). Resolving Pipe Interference | 227 . and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. If necessary. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. 43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. the pipe diameter. However. or width and height. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown.

watch the listening dimensions. 44 Press ESC. and split the supply pipe at 12' 0" from its left connector. 47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . you may get a false positive result. 46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs.Piping to make it the active view. 50 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. 228 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. select Fine for Detail Level. Otherwise. 51 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 5' 0" from its left connector. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. and double-click the section head to open the section view. 49 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. 45 On the View Control Bar. 48 Zoom in on the stairwell.Although this section was used for air systems. click (Split). 52 Using the methods that you learned. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section.

draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 53 Again. Resolving Pipe Interference | 229 .You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. using the methods that you learned. Remember to watch for connector snaps.

and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. you used the Split. navigate to the folder of your choice.54 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. preferably a connector snap. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. click File menu ➤ Save. Draw. 56 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. Then. In this exercise. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. Using these 2 methods. 55 If you want to save your work.rvtfile located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Remember that after you create pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (2) Connect to a snap. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. diameter (or width and height). you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. Using Create Similar. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. the pipe type is also matched. Open the i Connecting Boiler. the start point. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. and offset are automatically specified. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). 230 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click the Training Files icon. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs.

Piping to make it the active view. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. 3 In the Project Browser. the active view is the only open window. the active view is tiled to the left. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. TIP When tiling 2 views. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown.Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. You will design in the 2 . Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. Connecting the Boiler | 231 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and double-click 2 . Note that if this option is unavailable. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown.

click Pipe. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. Enter -5 0 for Offset. and after the connector snap displays. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at approximately 1' 6" from the boiler connection.8 Zoom in on the boiler. 10 In the Type Selector. 232 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 7 feet from level 1. 14 Move the cursor to the left. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. 13 On the Options Bar. watch the listening dimensions.

TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. enter -1 3 for Offset. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. In a later exercise. and click to specify the end point. zoom the view and try again. 16 On the Options Bar. 10' 9" from level 1. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. Connecting the Boiler | 233 .) to separate snap increments. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. 15 Draw the pipe up to 3’ 0". after listening dimensions display. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. Remember to always use a semi-colon (.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. TIP When drawing pipe. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps).

The boiler supply connector pipe is created. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. release the mouse button to connect to it. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar. click to specify the pipe segment end point. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. and after the connector snap displays. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe.17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. 234 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. Connecting the Boiler | 235 . The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. 236 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee. 24 With the windows tiled. 26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it.Next. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active.

verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 29 Click in the 2 . select the tee to display the connectors.28 In the 3D Piping view. Connecting the Boiler | 237 . Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. and after listening dimensions display. 30 Zoom in on the tee. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. and the start point is automatically specified. 34 Draw the pipe up. enter 3 0 and press Enter. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 33 Draw the pipe 2' 0" to the right and click to specify the segment end point. Verify that -5' 0" is specified for Offset. The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. 32 On the Options Bar. right-click the right connector.Piping view to make it active. 31 In the Type Selector.

connect the right supply pipe run. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. In a later exercise. 36 With the Draw tool activated. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 238 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . enter -1 3 for Offset. 38 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. 37 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. click to specify the end point. 35 On the Options Bar.This creates a 1 foot pipe segment. you will place a circulator pump on this segment.

The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 39 Check connectivity. 40 Validate the pipe geometry. Connecting the Boiler | 239 .

and click Draw Pipe. Optional: Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 41 With the windows tiled. you draw a 6 inch pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. 45 Move the cursor up. 44 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and the 2 . and enter 0 4 and press Enter. This places the return connection 10 inches above level 1. Next. enter -1 9 for Offset. verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter). 43 In the Type Selector. click the specify the end point. 240 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and that Auto Connect is selected.Piping the active view. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. 42 Select the boiler. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -11' -2" from level 2. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 10' 3" from level 1. 46 On the Options Bar. 47 Draw the pipe to the left.Next. and right-click the return connector. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. zoom in on the boiler.

48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 241 . and after the connector snap displays. click to connect to the left return pipe run.

49 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. 51 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. 242 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 52 Select the tee fitting. and click to specify the end point. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the right connector. 53 Draw the pipe 1' 0" to the right. 50 Zoom in on the boiler.The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run.

and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.54 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 243 . click to specify the end point.

56 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed.55 Using the method that you learned. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 244 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

Piping view. 61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. and then you select the point to align. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. and after highlights. in the 2 . Connecting the Boiler | 245 . click (Align).Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. If the Tools toolbar is not available. click to specify the alignment reference point. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. First. Next.58 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. 60 On the Tools toolbar. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. 59 With the 2 . click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. select the reference point where you want to align.

click to specify the point to align. 62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. and after the centerline highlights. 246 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return.

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 247

The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also are parametrically adjusted. This situation results because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that you aligned.

65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

66 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

248 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 67 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 68 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 249

The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.50 FT/100ft. Select And, and enter 8 FPS for Velocity. Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

250 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 251

Placing Circulator Pumps
In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).

8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 0' 3" from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

252 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector, select In-line Circulator : Standard. 14 Place the cursor between the pipe openings and click to place the circulator pump. 15 Select the pump and click Rotate on the toolbar. 16 Flip the pump so that the motor is on the left. 17 Click Align on the toolbar and select the middle of the pipe above and the middle of the circulator connector. NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 253

18 TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys or the Move tool for precise placement. 19 Press ESC twice. 20 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 22 On the Options Bar, click .

You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -5 0 for Offset. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

254 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

24 Click OK. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC. 25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 27 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 255

28 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity. 29 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB. The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

256 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

31 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 32 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

33 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

34 Click the rotation control on the right.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 257

The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system 36 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser. You can also press F9. 37 In the System Browser, do the following:
■ ■

Expand the Unassigned folder. Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located

258 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. 38 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar. TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar.

39 On the Options Bar, click

(Edit System).

The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 259

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. 42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System. 43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler. System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click

(Inspect).

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

260 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 261

11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

262 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems
Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The piping system is logically and physically valid. However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

Checking Piping Systems | 263

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.

264 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The red lines represent the default logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views, otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the piping system assignments. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All. The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 265

circulator pumps. the creation and modification methods remained the same. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. and section views. and fin-tube radiators. In this exercise. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. 15 Using the methods that you learned. navigate to the folder of your choice. specify 9' 9" for the supply and 9' 3" for the return pipe offset elevation. 17 In the Save As dialog. Finally. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. In this tutorial. a boiler. Design the system in the 1 . You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. Depending on your air systems design.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. For pipe offset. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe 266 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . For additional practice. In the lesson. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. and click Save. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. click File menu ➤ Save. it is a valid system without problems. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. 16 If you want to save your work. 3D. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building.

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. parametrically modify those designs.connections and creating logical systems. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2009. Explore different system designs. The completed mechanical systems are included in the i Completed Mechanical Systems. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). Checking Piping Systems | 267 .

268 .

rvt. if the link is lost. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. However. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. you learn to create electrical systems using a linked architectural model of a building project. After finishing each exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you can choose to save your work. In this tutorial. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. In this lesson you specify electrical settings. 269 . If the tutorial datasets are not present. and select i Office Building. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Electrical Systems 6 In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. However. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. go to http://www.autodesk. Planning Electrical Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. click Reload From.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. and create schedules that you will need to design the electrical systems for your project. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.

and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design.rvt. For this reason. expand Wiring. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. the Limit Offset. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. Lighting. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. wiring. For example. power. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. wiring. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Electrical Views. 3 Click Wiring Types. power distribution systems. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views. in the left pane. Later. and in the right pane. click Add (below the table). has been set to 10' 6" for the building used with these exercises. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. click the Training Files icon. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Insulation Max Size Value CU-THWN Copper 75 THWN 500 270 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan.The electrical settings determine the voltages. and demand factors that are applied in the design. then applying the appropriate template to each plan: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. and demand factors that you will use in your project. distribution systems.

By specifying a range.00V 260.00 V 460.00 V Minimum 110.Parameter Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value 1.00 V 220.00 V 240. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.00 V 220. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.00 V Maximum 130.00V 277. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.00V 280.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 271 . For example. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 240 277 480 Value 120.00 V 200. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.00 V 490. click Voltage Definitions.00 V 480.00 V 208.00 V 250.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V.

272 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 120/240 Single 480/277 Wye Phase Three Single Three Configuration Wye None Wye Wires 4 3 4 L-L 208 240 480 L-G 120 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. even though this is physically impossible. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. For example. 8 In the right pane.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. click Distribution Systems.

10 Click OK. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. Power.NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. For example. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. For this exercise. Red.000VA 10. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10.000VA 3. this type of system (High. at any given time. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. Preparing the Electrical Plan | 273 .000VA. More Than and Less Than values define the range for the associated Demand Factor: ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. 9 Click Demand Factors. HVAC. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. or Other systems in your project based on their load.000VA. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. leave the default settings as shown here.000VA 10. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that.

15 Click Open. and established the parameters for your wiring. A Lighting Devices ➤ Lighting Switches folder.rfa. containing several switch types. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.480V MCB . then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. and demand factors. 13 Select Lighting Switches. and click Open. has also been added under Lighting Device. and load the following families: ■ ■ Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 16 In the Project Browser. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close.Load component families 11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Imperial Library to the i families sub-folder. As an alternative. Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. distribution systems.rfa Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard folder. 274 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 274. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer folder. in the Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise.208V MLO . you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. selected components for your electrical systems.rfa family. conference rooms. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of spaces (offices. 17 Using the same method.rfa. 12 In the Open dialog. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and load Duplex Receptacle. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. and so on). 14 Using the same method. and load Dry Type Transformer . As you loaded each of the component families. Later. you can load from the components from that location.rfa 18 Using the same method. expand Families. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).Surface. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles.480-208Y120 . In this exercise. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. voltages.rfa. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. An Electrical Fixtures ➤ Duplex Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. restrooms. expand Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Devices.Surface. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.NEMA Type 2. 19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the Troffer Corner Insert.

Under Categories. move the cursor over the office in the upper-left corner.Lighting in the Space Element Properties dialog. as described below. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click OK twice. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 275 . 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. click Add. double-click 1 . click to select the space. The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project. Under Parameter Data. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Lighting Levels. To verify this. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Select Instance. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. For Type. you can look at the properties for one of the spaces. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. For Group. select Electrical-Lighting. For Discipline. select Spaces. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type. select Electrical.rvt.Open the provided dataset. select Illuminance. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical . and when the cross-hairs display.Lighting to make it the active view.

there are many spaces in this project that have similar lighting requirements. 12 Click OK. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list.7 On the Options Bar. enter Lighting Levels. For Key Name. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each space. However. ■ ■ ■ The Shedule Properties dialog displays. 276 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Click Schedule keys. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each space type. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar.Lighting category. For Name. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Spaces for Category. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on space type. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 8 Click Cancel. Click OK. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the space component. The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names. click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. enter Space Lighting Requirements. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). one for each type of space in the building.

scroll down to the Identity Data category. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties and. 16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan. and for Lighting Levels parameter. the Key Schedule should looks like this: TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. according to the values in the following table: Space Type Private Office Open Office Main Entrance Lounge Restroom Conference Elec/Mech Stair/Circulation Required Lighting Level (fc) 30 45 45 25 30 35 20 20 When completed. in the Element Properties dialog. and select Open Office. Assign space keys to the spaces in the project 15 In the Project Browser. double-click the 1 . click .Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule. under Instance Parameters. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 277 . and click Element Properties. 17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays. then right-click.Enter a space type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of spaces in the project.

Lighting 1 . 20 Click OK.19 Scroll up to the Electrical . the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting and apply Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog. Office). Level 1 . then open 2 . continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Name Office 101 Office 102 Office 103 Open 104 Mens Room 105 Elec/Mech 106 Ladies Room 107 Office 108 Office 109 Office 110 Office 111 Office 112 Office 113 Stairwell 114 Office 115 Office 116 Office 117 Key Name Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 278 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 21 Using the same method.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . While pressing Ctrl.Lighting category. The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Space Lighting Requirements key schedule.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting. select multiple spaces of the same type (for example. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected spaces. then right-click one of the selections. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 45 fc.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .

23 Click File menu ➤ Close. you could create a key schedule named Space Variables.Lighting 2 . You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Lighting 2 .Lighting Number 121 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Name Main Entrance 121 Office 201 Office 202 Office 203 Open 204 Mens Room 205 Elec/Mech 206 Ladies Room 207 Lounge 208 Office 209 Office 210 Office 211 Office 212 Stairwell 213 Conference Room 214 Office 215 Office 216 Key Name Main Entrance Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish.Level 1 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . For example. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels on page 280. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Lighting 2 . if required.Lighting 2 . Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values Defining Required Lighting Levels | 279 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . 24 Proceed to the next exercise.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .

and click OK. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. click Color Scheme Legend. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. select Required Lighting Level. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Color Fills. Space color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. for Name. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. 7 Click OK. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. enter Required Lighting Levels. double-click the 1 . The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. For Space Type. click Edit/New. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the space components. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise you will create a space color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the provided dataset.according to space type. 280 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select Spaces for Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ (Duplicate). Consequently. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. Under Title Text. and place it in the drawing. 6 For Color. and click Element Properties. click the Training Files icon. select Underline. and click 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click OK twice. select Required Lighting 10 Click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. enter Required Lighting. for Title. For Color Scheme. select Show Title.rvt. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. as described below.

19 Click File menu ➤ Close. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Using the same method.Lighting.Lighting floor plan the active view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/.16 Make the 2 . As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project. activate the color scheme as you did for 1 . Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for spaces. or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise). but only one per view. Open the provided dataset. 18 You can save the open file if you wish. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you create a space lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 281 .5 fc range specified in the schedule. You can have more than one color scheme in the project. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each space against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. as described below.

Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Schedule Lighting Requirements. For Type. enter Lighting Delta. click Calculated Value. select Illuminance. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. For Discipline. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. select Spaces. enter Space Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select Number. select Electrical. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. For Name. 282 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify that Ascending is selected. 2 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Create space lighting analysis schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. scroll down the Available fields list. double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane Create a new schedule parameter 4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Formula. Click OK. click the Training Files icon.rvt.Required Lighting Level. enter Average Estimated Illumination .

For Units.8 On the Formatting tab. 11 Click the Background Color chip. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 283 . select 2 decimal places. under Fields. and click Field Format. For Test. specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. select Ceiling Reflectance. 18 Click OK. select Lighting Delta. enter -5 fc and +5 fc in the text boxes. 15 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 19 You can save the open file if you wish. For Value. verify that Fixed is selected. select Lighting Delta. select Not Between. 16 Click OK. under Basic colors. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Field. click the red color chip. under fields. For Rounding. 9 Click Conditional Format. 14 On the Formatting tab. 13 Click OK twice. 12 In the Color dialog. 17 Using the same method. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This is because the value is not within the +/. and these areas will not be lighted. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. Average Estimated Lighting. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces. As you select and place lighting fixtures.5 fc range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. Name. Place the initial lighting fixture 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.20 Click File menu ➤ Close. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces as 0. Only the Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. Designing the Electrical System on page 284. In this exercise. these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column. and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Adding Lighting Fixtures. and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 284 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and double-click Space Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each space’s lighting requirement. Once the equipment is in place. However. Designing the Electrical System In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices. you will create power and lighting circuits. there is no required lighting level specified. and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. as described below. Adding Lighting Fixtures In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. Open the provided dataset.rvt. Floor Reflectance. As a result. Wall Reflectance. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance. and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. NOTE Right-click a heading. electrical equipment. NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. and make connections to electrical equipment. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. and lighting fixtures throughout your building project.

In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection. and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. double-click 1 . NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 3 Lamp. 11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan. 8 In the 1 . and arrange the windows as shown. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid. 10 In the Type Selector. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 7 On the Windows menu. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 285 .4 On the Windows menu. under Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. click Close Hidden Windows. click Tile.Ceiling Elec view. and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. click Lighting Fixture. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown.Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. 6 In the Project Browser.

286 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select it. 14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture. click (Move). 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture. and on the Toolbar. 15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture. and when Endpoint displays. click to specify the start point. and click when Intersection displays.12 Click Modify.

click 17 On the Options Bar. Copy and place additional lighting fixtures 16 Select the lighting fixture.5 fc.In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 287 . and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of level 1. the Lighting Delta for Office 101 is closer to the required +/. 18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point. and on the toolbar. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. (Copy). select Multiple. as shown.

TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. 102. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 2Lamp. press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. select one of the lighting fixtures in each space.Check the illumination levels against the Space Lighting Analysis schedule 19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.Ceiling Elec. The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101. 288 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Point by point analysis is not currently supported. Change lighting fixture type 20 In 1 . but is still not within the +/. and 103 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 30 fc. To adjust the illumination level downward. you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each space with a 2-lamp fixture.5 fc range. and in the Type Selector. so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these spaces. If you select a component inadvertently.

21 Again.Ceiling Elec views.Ceiling Elec and 2 . 22 Using the same method. and go on to the next exercise. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1 . Plenum and chase spaces will be blank.5 fc range. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 289 . The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/. Level 1 NOTE Lighting fixtures were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical spaces. check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. When you are finished. and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset.

and click Unhide All Columns. 290 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . right-click one of the headings.Level 2 23 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.

4 Click OK twice. right-click 1 . 9 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. under Schemes for the Spaces Category. Turn off the color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Placing Lighting Switches on page 291. 10 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of space 101. turn off the color scheme on level 2. as described below. 5 Using the same method. and click Properties. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Switches. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. click (none). 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Placing Lighting Switches In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. click in the Value column for Color Scheme. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open the provided dataset. your Lighting Delta column for all of the spaces should be white. 7 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. Placing Lighting Switches | 291 . verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces. 11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 8 In the Type Selector. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 1 . and click to place the switch. under Instance Parameters. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 24 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Lighting to make it the active view. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. Place switches in spaces 6 In the Project Browser.Lighting. click Device. click the Training Files icon. and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans.

select Lighting Switches : Three Way. 292 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 14 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.Lighting view as shown. and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown. and in the Type Selector.12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 . Level 1 13 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click Device.

and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. 17 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown.15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. 16 In the Type Selector. Placing Lighting Switches | 293 . select Lighting Switches : Four Way. and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. as shown.

21 On the Design Bar. double-click 2 . 294 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and in the Type Selector. 19 Click Modify.18 In the open office area. place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown. 22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown. select Lighting Switches : Three Way.Lighting to make it the active view. 20 In the Project Browser. click Device.

On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. Placing Lighting Switches | 295 . placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. 24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. in the Type Selector.23 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. click Device. and go on to the next exercise. as shown. and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset.

rvt.Level 2 25 You can save the open file if you wish. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the provided dataset. as described below. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Placing Power Receptacles In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Receptacles. and click View Properties. Placing Power Receptacles on page 296. Hide lighting components and specify view ranges 2 Right-click in the drawing area.Power to make it the active view. 296 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click the Training Files icon. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 1 .

clear Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 Click OK twice. 4 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard.Power plan view. Place wall-hosted receptacles 11 In the 1 . and specify the top of the view range as 10' 0". edit the Visibility/Graphics Overrides for the view to hide lighting fixtures and lighting devices. 12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.Power. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 13 In the Type Selector. click Device. on the Model Categories tab. for Top. under Primary Range. scroll down and. 14 On the Options Bar.3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. under Instance Properties. scroll down to View Range. 5 Click OK. right-click 2 . and for Offset. enter 10' 0". Placing Power Receptacles | 297 . 10 Using the same method. and click Edit. including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas. 15 In the left side of the plan. select Associated Level (Level 1). 7 In the View Range dialog. and edit the View Range to select Associated Level (Level 2). 16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. and click Properties. click Edit.

1-Power 298 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

18 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click for Plane. and place a receptacle on the floor as shown. 21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. Placing Power Receptacles | 299 . 20 On the Options Bar.Power.2-Power Place floor-hosted receptacles 17 In the Project Browser. The current level is selected by default. click Device. and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. double-click 1 . (Place on Work Plane). 19 In the Type Selector.

select Multiple. 24 On the Toolbar. and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles. it is important that the connector be within the space to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. as shown. When placing a receptacle on a work plane. 26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point. its connector is located below the level of the work plane.22 Click Modify. as shown. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right side of the Level 1 open office. 300 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click (Copy). This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. click . (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work 25 On the Options Bar. 23 Select the receptacle and click plane (within the space). In the next steps. you will flip the work plane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the work plane. 27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles. select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures.

Placing Power Receptacles | 301 . as shown.28 Draw a pick box around the 2 floor-based receptacles. and click on the Options Bar. select Multiple 29 Using the previous procedure. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below. and to the left of the men’s restroom. as shown. .

then copy and paste them in the 2 . 33 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 303. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.30 Using the same procedure. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. open 2 .Power as shown. and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View.Power floor receptacles.Power view. 302 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Power. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 . Select all 1 . 31 You can save the open file if you wish. place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2 .Power view.

select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area 6 Click OK. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components. With the introduction of local energy codes. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Usage Reports. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as described below. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. because it is quite common in Revit MEP. and for Name. Open the provided dataset. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces. 4 Click OK. the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design.In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. A schedule is created similar to the one shown. enter Power & Lighting Usage. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports | 303 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected. under Available Fields. and select Spaces.rvt. click the Training Files icon. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you can refer to this report rather than having to measure spaces and count fixtures. scroll down the Category list.

9 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. and work toward the higher voltage. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 304 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. Placing Electrical Equipment on page 304.7 You can save the open file if you wish. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Power. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. click the Training Files icon. under Instance Parameters.Loads.Open the provided dataset. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. and click to place the panel as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected.Surface : 250A. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms.Loads category. 9 Click OK. under Electrical . and double-click 1 . click . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. for Distribution Sys. scroll down to the Electrical .rvt. Right-click the panel. select 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : 45kVA. and for Panel Name. Placing Electrical Equipment | 305 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a transformer 10 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Electrical Equipment. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. select 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. select Electrical Equipment. 4 In the Type Selector. as described below. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical space to the right of the panel as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. click Electrical Equipment. click Element Properties. select 480/277 Wye.

for Distribution Sys. for Distribution Sys. select Electrical Equipment. under Instance Parameters. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. scroll down to the Electrical . select 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and place the panel to the right of the transformer. and on the Options Bar. Since this is a transformer. enter T1. select 120/208 Wye. 20 Select the panel you just placed. and on the Options Bar. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.Loads category. click . select 480/277 Wye. 16 Click OK.Surface : 100A.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. 19 Click Modify. 306 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . For Panel Name. and for Panel Name. scroll down to the Electrical . enter L-1.Loads category. under Instance Parameters. click . 14 On the Options Bar. 23 Click OK. 18 In the Type Selector. select 120/208 Wye.

29 Select the transformer T2. . In this case you are going to select something other than a panel. and select panel H-2 for Panel. click as shown. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit.Surface : 250A named H-2 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: 45kVA named T2 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . The temporary circuit displays Placing Electrical Equipment | 307 . 26 On the Options Bar.Surface : 100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. select panel L-2. click (Create Power Circuit). including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. and click 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Click (Select Panel). add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. . 28 On the Options Bar.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method.

select the L-1 panel. 308 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and select the T1 transformer as the panel.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. select the H-2 panel. . A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. click 35 On the Option Bar. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. 38 On the Options Bar. click . The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. 34 In the 2-Power view. 37 Close the 2-Power view. and click 39 Click . and on the Options Bar. and select the MDP panel. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces side-by-side. .

42 You can save the open file if you wish. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. click .40 Select the T1 transformer. and select the MDP panel. lighting. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Power Circuitry | 309 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click 41 On the Options Bar. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. and data systems. Creating Power Circuitry on page 309. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Circuits are used for power. as described below. click the Training Files icon. Open the provided dataset.

The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. and voltage (120 V). 3 While pressing Ctrl. and double-click 1 . Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. load (180 VA). 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office. 4 On the Options Bar.■ Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Power Circuitry. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. click . select all the receptacles in the corner office. For now. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). 310 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .rvt.Power to make it the active view.

click for this circuit.A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance parameters. 6 Click Modify. the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the office. and press Tab. You use the Specify Circuit Information to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit. Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. 8 On the Options Bar. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). press Tab. and click to select the circuit again. Creating Power Circuitry | 311 . and select panel L-1 as the panel NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted.

14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. 1-#6. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. 1-#10. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. 1-#12. which are the wire sizes for the load. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. neutral. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. Wire Type and Rating.10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. 1-#12. When editing a circuit. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. change the value from 20A to 50A. 12 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. 11 On the Options Bar. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. click (Edit Circuit). respectively for this circuit. and ground wiring. 312 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click (Circuit Properties). Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. The currently specified values are 1-#12. will be discussed in a later exercise. The editable parameters.

and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. and add it to panel L-1. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a space-by-space basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. under Instance Parameters. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. 24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. click . 25 On the Options Bar. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. 19 Close the warning message.Loads category. creating power circuits. as previously described. click . and select panel L-1.15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. 26 Continue creating circuits. and click Element Properties. 22 Click OK. click Cancel. scroll down to the Electrical . NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. Creating Power Circuitry | 313 . Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. click . 16 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. These will be connected in a later exercise. If you select L-1 in the drawing. and then select panel L-1. and try to select panel L-1. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. click . click The circuit is created. . for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles.

31 You can save the open file if you wish. Finally. These will be connected in a later exercise. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. and on the Options Bar. 28 Double-click 1 . As you saw in the previous exercise. 29 Select the L-1 panel. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.Power to make it the active view. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. create circuits in the 2 .Power view and assign them to panel L-2. 30 Click OK. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. Adding wiring to a project is optional. you have assigned only 17. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 314. 314 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .27 Using the same procedures. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In the Edit Circuits dialog. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Increase the number of circuits on panel L-2 to 18. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits.

click Edit in the Value column. as shown. select Associated Level. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 3' 0" 5 Click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. select Electrical Lighting Plan. for Level. Click 3 In the right pane. right-click 1 . select <all>. select Lighting. 11 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. 6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline. click the Training Files icon. in the Value column. 8 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Names.Lighting to make it the active view. click (Filter). Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. under View Properties. for Top. select Electrical Plan . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 315 .Open the provided dataset. For Names. click Check None to clear all the check boxes.rvt. enter -1' 0" For Bottom. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. and for Offset.Lighting. and for Offset. enter 3' 0" Under View Depth. 10 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. Create an Electrical Lighting Plan template for Lighting Views 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. as described below. 13 In the Filter dialog. and for Offset. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 4 In View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Electrical Lighting Plan. Create lighting circuits 9 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. select Level Above. and click OK. select Associated Level. for View Range. and click OK. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. 2 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ For Show Type. double-click 1 . and in the New View Template dialog.

15 Close the message window and. 16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). click . click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation.14 On the Options Bar. 316 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

When creating wires. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches.17 On the Options Bar. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. ceilings. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 317 . lighting fixtures. click . press Tab. click (Filter). click Check None. you can specify splined wiring. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. and click OK. ground) in the wire run. you created arc type wiring. or floors. Splined wiring is similar to arc. click . In this step. click circuit. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. select Wires. when you create wiring manually. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the . Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. and click the switch to select the switches. In the next steps. but with an additional vertex. as in this step. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. neutral. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. 20 On the Options Bar. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. 21 In the Filter dialog. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. 18 On the Options Bar. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. Later.

for Hot Conductors. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. 27 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. enter 2. and click OK. right-click the MDP panel. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. under Instance Parameters. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22. 25 In the Mech/Elec space. and click OK. and one ground conductor). The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 318 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. When this occurs. enter 2 as the value. 24 Using the same method.22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . scroll down to the Electrical . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1.Loads category. and click Element Properties. and assign each circuits to panel MDP. 28 Create permanent wiring for each circuit. one neutral conductor.

close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. and restrooms in the 2 . NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit.Loads category.Lighting view. 31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18.Lighting view. then creating lighting circuits in 2 . lounge. assign the circuit to panel H-2. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. 30 Right-click panel H-2. Otherwise. scroll down to the Electrical . 32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 319 . and click OK. These will be connected in a later exercise. under Instance Parameters. and assign each circuit to panel H-2. conference room.Lighting.29 For more practice. and in the Element Properties dialog. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1 .

fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Switch Systems.33 You can save the open file if you wish. 1 In the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and double-click 1 . 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires.rvt. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. assign lighting fixtures to switches. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. and specify switch IDs for switches. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. 320 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . but does not prevent you from doing so. as described below. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. you will create a space schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs.Lighting to make it the active view. and panel information. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. Open the provided dataset.

click (Create Switch System). Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding switches). and on the Options Bar. 4 Click (Select Switch for System). 5 With the switch system still selected. ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. select The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. on the Options Bar. and click to select everything in the system. click The Switch System toolbar is activated. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want.2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. click (Filter) to select only the lighting fixtures. click Multiple. click Finish to confirm your selections. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. 3 On the Options Bar. (Remove From System). press Tab. Then. Creating Switch Systems | 321 . TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system. (Edit Switch System). 6 On the Switch System toolbar. you can highlight one of the lighting fixtures. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. After creating the switch system.

8 On the Options Bar. 9 Click (Switch Properties). 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. under Instance Properties. click Finish. for Switch ID. for Switch ID.7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. under Instance Properties. 15 Click 16 Click . 17 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Main Entrance . and click OK. click . and click OK. click Finish. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The Switch ID is updated on the Options Bar. enter North Stairwell . and select the switch on the wall 14 On the Switch System toolbar. click outside the ladies’ restroom.West. 11 On the Switch System toolbar.1st Floor. 13 On the Options Bar. 322 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . (Switch Properties). The Number of Fixtures field now displays 27 fixtures remaining in the system. (Select Switch).

and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. and on the Options Bar. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. scroll down the Available fields list. click Finish. stairwell.18 On the Switch System toolbar. enter Space Number. Creating Switch Systems | 323 . 21 Using the same method. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. click . select Number from the Fields list. 26 On the Formatting tab. enter Switch Systems.Lighting view. Verify that Ascending is selected. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. 20 Click . Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. For Name. Click OK. and restrooms in the 1 . select Spaces. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. and for Heading. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. select Number.

The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. 31 You can save the open file if you wish.Lighting view. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. Otherwise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. restrooms. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. continue creating switch systems in the 2 . The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close.2nd Floor for the switch ID. 30 For more practice. conference room.28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and private offices. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. Specify Open Area . Create separate systems for the lounge. scroll down the Available fields list. 324 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

Power to make it the active view. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. 5 Using the same method. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces along the left side of the plan. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the corner office. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 1 . move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. as described below.rvt. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. Open the provided dataset. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 325 .

7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper offices are visible. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top office to specify the start point for the wire. 326 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 8 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and delete both home runs.6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper offices. click Wire.

as shown. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 327 .11 Click in the open area near the door for the office to specify the second point for the wire. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint for the wire.

Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower offices. your layout should look similar to the following: Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the 328 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . When completed. and using the same method. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. The direction will be corrected. when the wiring is completed. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. if necessary.

and a shared safety ground). the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. In the previous steps. 17 Right click the wire run.number of hot conductors. 14 Click Modify. select Insert Vertex. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower office as shown. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. and click. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower office. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. as the circuits in each office was added to the wiring run. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 329 . a shared neutral. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector.

Power and 2 . you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1 . The wire behaves like a spline.Power views. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise. 19 For additional practice. Completed 1-Power 330 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon.Power to make it the active view. Checking Your Design | 331 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Checking Your Design. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. Checking Your Design on page 331.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. and double-click 1 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. 7 In the System Browser. 332 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. each with a load of 180VA. release the mouse button. 6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser. 5 Right-click a column heading. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. 4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. and click Select. 8 In the System Browser. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. and when the preview expands to the width of the window.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner office is visible. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.

and 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell.Lighting and 2 . and expand Unassigned. Checking Your Design | 333 . 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 1.The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 .Lighting views and close any windows. 10 Open the 1 . collapse Power. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel.Power.

The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 . click 15 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. until the power circuit is previewed. 17 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. clear Multiple. to 334 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click Finish.Lighting view. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. press Tab several times. click create permanent wiring. and on the Options Bar. 13 In the 1 . (Add to Circuit).Lighting view have not yet been connected. click to select the circuit. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. In the System Browser. 16 Click the title bar of the 2 .Lighting view. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. 18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. and on the Options Bar. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. click .

select Wires. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. In the System Browser. 22 Click . 26 On the Options Bar. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. and click OK.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 24 In the Project Browser. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. 21 In the Filter dialog. for Hot Conductors. and click OK. enter 2. . select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. 25 In the drawing area.Lighting view. click the title bar of the 2 .Lighting view. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. press Tab. click 27 On the Options Bar. select panel L-1. under Instance Parameters. Checking Your Design | 335 . and in the Mechanical/Electrical space. click Check None. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. 19 In the 1 . 20 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click . double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.

28 Click to create permanent wiring. 336 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

Checking Your Design | 337 .29 Using the same method. click Check Circuits. create a power circuit for the 6 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. 33 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. 32 Click to view details of the warning. 31 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Check Circuits 30 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

338 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected.Power. as described below.This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. 36 Click File menu ➤ Close. Finally. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open the provided dataset. and double-click 2 . Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Circuit Loads. 35 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. 34 Close the Warning dialog. In the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.rvt. In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Defining Circuit Loads on page 338. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. click the Training Files icon.

select panel L-2. B. and Phase C provides 3780 VA. and Phase C . 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. Phase B 4860 VA. Defining Circuit Loads | 339 .4320 VA). while Phase A provides 4860 VA. 5 Click OK. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . click Rebalance Loads. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 5040 VA on Phase B. click . Examination of the loads on Phase A.4500 VA.2 In the Mechanical/Electrical space.

double-click 1 . so no further changes are required. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. click . H-2 is a 100A panel. the H-2 panel. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. The remaining circuits feed the lighting circuits on Level 1. you can use a 30kVA transformer. 12 Click OK. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. enter 100A for the Trip value. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 340 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. the actual load connected to it (12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. 14 In the Type Selector. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. . for panel H-2. After the loads are balanced. and present a load 6496 VA. click 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. L-1 and MDP.Power view. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. the 3 circuits feed transformer T1. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 10 Select panel MDP. 9 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. and for T1. Therefore. in the Mechanical/Electrical space.Power. select the T1 transformer. 7 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. The 3 circuits that feed panel H-2 present a load of 18844 VA. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. and present a load of 12960 VA. Therefore. and the T1 transformer. enter 40A for the Trip value. 13 In the 1 . you may see different values for the loads.6 Select panel H-2.

00A. 1-#1. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1.Power view. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. select panel H-2. 21 Scroll down. 1-#12. 19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. 18 With panel L-1 selected. enter 100A for Rating. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. for transformer T2. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. enter 40A for the Trip value. 100. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space.Power to make it the active view. 22 Click OK. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. 27 In the 2 . click (Circuit Properties). click . you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. 28 In the Type Selector. 20 Under Electrical-Loads. double-click 2 . and click Element Properties. Notice that it changes to 3-#1. 1-#8. on the Options Bar. 26 Click OK.Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. select the T2 transformer. 23 In the Project Browser. Verify/adjust wire sizes 15 Right-click panel L-1. 25 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Defining Circuit Loads | 341 .00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. 17 Click OK. 1-#12. and on the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters.

Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. double-click 1 . 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. click . A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. 34 Close the Warning.00A. 31 Click OK. 35 On the Options Bar. 29 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties.Power to make it the active view. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. Size the service entrance conductors 32 In the Project Browser. under Electrical Loads. click . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 33 With the MDP panel selected. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. under Instance Parameters. 36 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. 342 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 37 You can save the open file if you wish. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly.

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2009. including plumbing fixtures. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. In this tutorial. go to http://www. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. you will understand the process. navigate to Training Files ➤ Architectural. However. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder.autodesk. and select i Office Building. By following this workflow. hot and cold water piping. click Reload From. and sanitary piping.rvt. methodology. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. If the tutorial datasets are not present. As you create the plumbing system. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. 343 . This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient.Plumbing Systems 7 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. if the link is lost. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. At the end of this tutorial. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. However. In this tutorial. you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After finishing each exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.

You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. In this lesson. 344 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Water Closet . click the Training Files icon.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click the Training Files icon. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Loading Plumbing Parts.rfa 5 Click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Wall Hung.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Flush Valve . 3 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing.Floor Mounted. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa Urinal . planning is critical to a successful design. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system.

6 Under Mechanical. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Configuring Plumbing and Pipe Systems. 3 Right-click PVC 2.Wall Hung.rvt. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Pipe Bend .PVC: Standard Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 345 . are added under Families in the Project Browser. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon.Flush Valve . select Pipe Bend .Glued. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 345. select None For Cross. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Sanitary . select Pipe Transition . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow.PVC .rfa Pipe Reducing Short Tee . select Tee For Tee.6 In the Project Browser. select Pipe Cross . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter PVC Sanitary. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. The selected component families are loaded into the project.Sanitary . 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.Glued: Standard For Transition. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. All of the loaded families.Glued. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Properties. for New.rfa 11 Click Open. click Rename. select Pipe Short Tee . Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 2 Right-click PVC. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog.PVC: Standard For Tap.DWV . Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: Water Closet . 5 In the Rename dialog. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing.Floor Mounted and Urinal . and click Duplicate. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures. and click OK. click the Training Files icon.PVC: Standard For Preferred Junction Type.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. select Pipe Coupling . 11 You can save the open file if you wish. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. enter PVC Sanitary Vent. verify that Pipe Cross . for Name.PVC: Standard For Tap. Add Plumbing Fixtures on page 346. verify that Pipe Bend .■ For Union. verify that Pipe Transition . ZR (Zoom Region). you create systems to logically connect the fixtures.Glued: Standard is selected For Transition. Finally. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view.PVC: Standard is selected For Union. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. then click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. verify that Pipe Coupling . 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.PVC: Standard 7 Click Apply.PVC: Standard is selected 10 Click OK to close the Type Properties dialog. 346 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 13 Proceed to the next exercise. You then modify the piping. you add 2 toilets.PVC: Standard is selected For Preferred Junction Type.Vent . and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. select Pipe Tee . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Adding Plumbing Fixtures. 3 urinals. select None For Cross. 3 sinks. In this lesson. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. verify that Tee is selected For Tee.PVC . 9 Under Mechanical. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click OK.

6 Click Modify. 3 wall-mounted urinals. click Dimension. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.Flush Valve . Position the first toilet 7 Position the toilet 6" from the upper wall. a On the Design Bar.The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. and click to place the toilet in the approximate location shown. click Plumbing Fixture. and 1' 6" from the right wall. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 347 .Floor Mounted : Private 1.6 gpf in the Type Selector. 5 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. and 3 sinks. 4 Select Water Closet .

The toilet is placed 6" from the upper wall of the toilet stall. and press Enter. enter 1' 6". j Delete both dimension annotations. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Copy). g Select the toilet. Wall faces is selected for Prefer. i Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. and Individual References is selected for Pick. h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet. click the value for the blue dimension to the right. click 9 On the Options Bar. move the cursor over the center of the toilet. place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the back of the toilet. Clear Constrain Verify that Copy is selected Clear Multiple 348 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and press Enter. f Click Modify. c Click the face of the right wall. verify that (Aligned) is selected. The toilet is placed 1' 6" from the right wall. d Move the cursor down. e Using the same method. and click to place the dimension annotation. and click.b On the Options Bar. Add a second toilet 8 Select the toilet. enter 0' 6".

11 Move the preview of the toilet 5' 0" to the left (into the left stall).10 Click the center line of the toilet to establish a start point. click to place the toilet as shown. and on the Options Bar. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 349 . move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. and when the alignment snap displays and the preview is from the original toilet. and place 3 urinals approximately as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. and click. click Dimension.Wall Hung : 3/4 Flush Valve in the Type Selector. do the following. 14 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. Place wall-mounted urinals 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 13 Select Urinal . place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. 19 Using the same method. 18 Move the cursor down. and click to place the dimension annotation. 15 Click Modify. ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. and on the Options Bar. select Wall centerlines Verify that Individual References is selected for Pick 17 Click the centerline of the left wall. click Plumbing Fixture. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

27 On the Options Bar click (Place on Face).Single : 18"x18". The urinal is placed 1' 8" from the wall of the toilet stall. 25 While pressing Ctrl. and in the Type Selector. select Sink . and click to place the dimensions annotation. click the centerline of each urinal in succession. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. place the leftmost urinal 1' 8" from the left wall. (Equal Control) 24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. click the value for the blue dimension. and press Delete. 21 Select the rightmost urinal. and click the blue above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. and enter 1' 8". click Plumbing Fixture. 350 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select the counter top. 28 In the drawing area. then move the cursor up. Place sinks 26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 22 Using the same method. 23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals.Island .20 Working from left to right.

30 Place 3 sinks. as shown. and click to place the floor drain. specify the distance between the drain center line and the lower wall as 1' 6". 33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. Place the floor drain 36 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 31 Click Modify. 34 Using the same method specify the distance between the center line of the wall below the sinks and the center line of each sink. specify the distance between the center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 1' 10". 38 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 351 . click Plumbing Fixture. click Dimension. approximately as shown. then equalize the space between sinks. 32 On the Design Bar. 35 Delete the dimension annotations.29 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. select Floor Drain .3" Drain. 37 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane). select Level : Level 2.Round : 5" Stainer . and in the Type selector. and for Plane.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to View Range. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. 42 Proceed to the next exercise.39 Click Modify. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. and floor drain. specify Fine for Detail Level. 4 In the View Range dialog. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Level Offset 5 Click OK twice. In this exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Starting the Sanitary Piping System. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 352. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. 6 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click View Properties.rvt. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Edit. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Bottom Offset Under View Depth. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. verify the view range settings: ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 352 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. urinals. under Extents. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system.

and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 353 . 18 Zoom in on the men’s room. 16 Right-click in the system browser table heading.The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. as shown. Click Window ➤ System Browser. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click View ➤ Piping. specify -1' 0" 13 Click OK. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Branch. 19 On the Options Bar. toilets. specify -1' 0" 11 In the left panel. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. select Sanitary from the System Type list. and click Main. and floor drain. click Mechanical Settings. 9 In the right panel. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. click (Create Sanitary System). while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. The urinals.

354 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. and click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8" for Slope. select 4". for Offset. 24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and a preview of the piping layout displays. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. 21 Click (Thin Lines) on the toolbar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and on the Options Bar. click Sanitary 1. 28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click (Layout Path). specify -4' 0" and for D. 23 In the Select a System dialog. 25 Move the cursor over the chase.20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the view. 22 Select one of the components in the newly created sanitary system. click Solutions. click Place Base. 27 On the Design Bar. and click to place the base approximately as shown.

and do the following: a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle of the chase above the urinals. to view them. click Modify. 29 Select solution 1. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines.Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. It’s easier if each segment can be moved to a snap. Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 355 . Customize the layout 30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout. Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. and on the Design Bar. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). as needed.

31 Click Finish Layout.b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the rightmost toilet. This makes it easier to locate a snap. NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment to the same location. and click to align the branch to the main segment. d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal. Snap the main in the middle of the chase. and drag the segment down into the chase. select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. 356 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . c Using the same method.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 357 . The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. checking for the proper connectivity. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. b Select each pipe segment in the system. as shown. When a fitting is reversed. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. The second tab highlights the fixture. The third tab should highlight the entire system. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. and check the slope control.32 Examine the piping that was automatically created. slope. and orientation of fittings: a Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

click Show categories from all disciplines. 358 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 36 Click OK. VG (Visibility/Graphics). specify Fine for Detail Level. and double-click 3D Plumbing.33 In the Project Browser. 35 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Enter the keyboard shortcut. 34 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. 37 On the View Control Bar. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.

and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Connecting Sink Drain Lines. click the Training Files icon. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. adding the sinks in the men’s room.38 You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 359 to continue creating the sanitary system. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 359 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

right-click the connector on the open leg. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. When you press the space bar. and on the Options Bar. verify that 1/8" /12" is specified for the slope. and click Draw Pipe. 360 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 13.4 Select the tee. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 7 Click Modify. press the Space Bar once. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and press Enter.

click to place the fitting. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and press Enter. and select Pipe Reducing Wye-DWV-Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 361 . click Pipe Fitting.If you select the pipe. click Pipe Fitting. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. click the blue size control for the wye leg. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. and when the snap displays. click to place the fitting. 10 Click Modify. 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. enter 2". and select Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard in the Type Selector. and when the extension snap displays. 11 Select the fitting.

highlight the wye. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. click to specify the end of the first segment of pipe.14 Click Modify. and when the end of the pipe is even with wall centerline. 15 Using the method learned earlier. 17 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. click to specify the end of the pipe. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. verify that Auto Connect is selected. 16 Select the wye fitting. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down to a point approximately even with the centerline of the wall below the sinks. 362 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click Draw Pipe. 19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. and on the Options Bar. and that 1/8" /12" is specified for slope. right-click the connector on the open leg.

21 In the Project Browser. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink.20 On the Options Bar. press Space. enter 0' 6" for Offset. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described in the previous exercise. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. click Pipe Fitting. 24 On the Plumbing tab. In this case.Glued : Standard. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Double Wye . check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. the vertical pipe extends above the level of the floor. If necessary. click Apply.DWV . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 363 . and click Modify. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. and click to place the fitting. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. 22 In the 3D view.

TIP When entering dimensions. 26 Click Modify. 31 On the View Control Bar. and in the drawing area. and for Model Graphics Style.The double wye is added to the vertical segment. specify Fine. 32 Enter the keyboard shortcut. as 27 Select the double wye fitting. If necessary. specify Hidden Line. in this step you can enter 0 8 (zero space eight) to specify 8". In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. click shown above. without having to enter ' and " symbols. 30 Double-click the head of the section to open the section view. click Section. and on the Options Bar. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 28 Double-click 2 . to orient the fitting. 29 On the View tab Design Bar. VG (Visibility/Graphics) to hide architectural components that will interfere with selecting plumbing components. specify 0' 8" for Offset. place a section below the sinks as shown. for Detail Level. 364 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing to make it the active view. For example.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 365 . 40 Select the double-wye fitting again. do the following: a Click Show categories from all disciplines b Click All. and on the Options Bar. then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg. draw the pipe up to the left. 41 Click Modify. then clear the check from Lines e Click OK 34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting. 36 Click Modify. draw the pipe up. click None. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 0 6 and press Enter.33 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and clear the check from any category c Clear Show categories from all disciplines. click Pipe. and click All again d Select any category. On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 1 0 and press Enter. After adding the piping to the right and left leg. draw a 1' pipe from the right leg of the double-wye. in line with the angle for the leg. specify 0' 6". The fitting moves to the left when pipe is connected to the left leg. 37 Using the same method. 38 Click the connector snap on the center leg. 39 Click Modify. for Offset.

47 Click Modify. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 48 Using the same method. 43 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. 50 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks.42 In the Project Browser. and select the leftmost sink. 45 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. do the following: ■ ■ For Offset. 49 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Pipe. and on the Options Bar. 366 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . enter 1' 6".Plumbing. and click Apply Verify 1/8" /12" is specified for slope 46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 44 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and in the Type Selector. double-click 3D Plumbing. and double-click 2 . select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary.

select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it. 54 On the Options Bar. for D. While pressing Ctrl. and on the Options Bar. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. 59 Using the same method. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. and on the Options Bar. 61 Select the double-wye. 56 While pressing Ctrl. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. specify 1 1/2".Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size. (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through 55 Select solution 9 of 16. and on the Options Bar. 53 While pressing Ctrl. specify 2". select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. for D. select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16. You use the proposed solutions. click Routing Solutions. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). click Routing Solutions. 52 Click Modify. 60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. 58 Click Modify. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 367 . 57 Select solution 7of 7. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. and select a proposed solution.

enter 1/8" / 12". for Slope. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the segment where the slope could not be applied. 368 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 65 On the Options Bar. and click Finish.Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. 64 On the toolbar. This is to be expected. Close the warning. 63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar.

and click Select. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. expand Sanitary. specify the slope for the piping to the left sink. 68 On the Options Bar. 67 In the System Browser. This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without changing the slope. right-click Sanitary 1. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. You can move fixtures by dragging. click Finish on the Options Bar. 70 In the drawing area. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 369 . and under Instance Parameters. Then. click Multiple. you can specify the elevation of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe. click to select the reference end of the pipe. specify the exact Offset. (Add to System). click Element Properties. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. When zoomed in close. while pressing Ctrl. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. then click Finish on the Edit System toolbar.66 Using the same method. the piping to the middle sink is already sloped. Since the routing solution applied to the middle sink used the existing pipe (without adding a segment). select all 3 sinks. modifying offset values. If necessary. 72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. click 69 On the Edit System toolbar. right-click the pipe. there is a smaller movement. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to the zoom level. NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical. and on the Options Bar. click (Edit System). you can make minor adjustments to the system.

DWV .DWV . (After the third tab. 73 While pressing Ctrl. 75 Using the method learned earlier.DWV . select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. and select Pipe Bend . 74 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.Glued : Standard. the entire system should be highlighted. Now that the routing is completed.When the piping was created for the sink drains. select Pipe Bend .Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. Pipe Bend . you can change these to the more commonly used Pipe Bend .) 370 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . highlight the leftmost sink.Glued : Standard.PVC : Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. and in the Type Selector.

3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Waste Stack Connection. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. skip the next 2 steps. 77 You can save the open file if you wish. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 78 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 79 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. while maintaining the same angle. Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 371 to continue creating the sanitary system. otherwise. and select the horizontal pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 371 .rvt. adjusting the sanitary stack.76 If you want to save your work. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click File menu ➤ Save As. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon.

and select Pipe Reducing Wye . 372 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Glued : Standard. specify 6" for D (diameter). 7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe).4 Select the elbow. Add a reducing wye to the stack 6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical pipe segment.DWV . and when the Extension snap displays. click Pipe Fitting. and click to place the fitting. and on the Options Bar. and press Delete.

click the value for the 45 degree leg.8 Click Modify. select the wye. and click the sanitary piping. If necessary.Plumbing. 11 On the View tab on the Design Bar. The wye is added to the vertical segment. click Section. enter 4 to change its size. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 10 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 373 . draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. double-click 2 . and press Enter. and click Modify. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward 9 Select the wye.

and select the reducing wye fitting. click Draw Pipe. 16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg. click to specify the end of the pipe. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. specify Fine. press Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. enter -2' 6" for Offset. 14 Zoom in. 13 On the View Control Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. for Detail Level. 374 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and when the center line for the main segment displays. and press Enter.

24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. then enter 4 0 and press Enter to add a 4' 0" vertical vent pipe. 18 While pressing Ctrl. 19 On the Options Bar. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. However. and in the Type Selector. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Bend . and on the Options Bar. The exact position of the riser is not critical in this application. 22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. select solution 3 of 3.DWV .Glued : Standard. 17 Click Modify. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). 23 Click Modify. 21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 375 . it will be necessary to move the piping after making the connection.NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the reducing tee. click Routing Solutions. The fitting moves toward the pipe being added after the pipe is drawn. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. when the location is critical. 20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool. click Draw Pipe.

(If necessary. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. running it inside the wall. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close.) 376 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings. then down to connect with the sanitary main. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Refining the Urinal Lines on page 376 to continue creating the plumbing system. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.25 You can save the open file if you wish. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. click the Training Files icon. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Urinal Waste Lines. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click OK. (Connect Into). press the Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost urinal displays. click the pipe above the urinal. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. click Connector 2 : Sanitary Round : 2" Out. click to specify the end of the pipe.3 Press Delete. 11 Select the leftmost urinal. click Draw Pipe. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 0' 6". for Offset. The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. Refining the Urinal Lines | 377 . 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left. 12 In the Select Connector dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the end of the pipe. starting at the level of the original pipe. specify 2" Click (Auto Connect) ■ ■ For slope. click 13 In the drawing area. enter 0' 6" and press Tab. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector For D. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. click the connector snap. specify 1/8" /12" 7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 8". 10 Click Modify. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. and on the Options Bar.

(Slope). expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 18 On the Options Bar. 378 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing to make it the active view. Do not include the riser and fitting. and click Finish. 19 In the Project Browser. verify that 1/8" /12" for Slope. 16 In the Filter dialog.14 Using the same method. click The slope is applied to the selected piping. clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK. click (Filter Selection). double-click 3D. connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main. 15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 2" piping just added as shown. and on the Options Bar. 17 On the Routing Modify toolbar. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously.

However. double-click 2 . and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 4" segment) as shown. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. 21 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. So.Resize pipes 20 In the Project Browser.Plumbing to make it the active view. Refining the Urinal Lines | 379 . 22 On the Options Bar. specify 3" for D (diameter).

31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.Add a cleanout 23 Select the pipe between the 3" elbow and the left urinal. verify that Pipe Reducing Short Tee . and on the Options Bar. 25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. click Pipe Fitting. and in the Type Selector.Sanitary . and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. select 3". and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. double-click 3D.Plumbing to make it the active view. Redefine fittings 28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. click to place the plug on the tee. 24 Select the elbow. and when the extension snap displays. 26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal.Glued : Standard is selected. 27 Select the pipe to the urinal again. 30 In the Project Browser. 380 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select Pipe PVC Plug : Standard. 29 Select the 2" pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main. 32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals. specify 2" for D. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. then select 2". and in the Type Selector. for D. specify 3" for D (diameter).

Refining the Urinal Lines | 381 . 34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe.DVW . 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. and select Pipe Bend .This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow.Glued : Standard. 35 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. 382 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . If necessary. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.36 You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Vents to the System on page 382 to continue creating the plumbing system. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described previously. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.rvt.

7 Click Apply. VG (Visibility/Graphics). 6 On the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. NOTE You must press Tab or move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. do the following: a Click Edit/New. and specify 14' for Offset. click Pipe. 8 Click Modify. specify 2" for D (diameter). Apply a filter to the vent piping 9 Enter the keyboard shortcut. specify 0" for Rise/12". select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. 10 On the Filters tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Adding Vents to the System | 383 .4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

select IMPORT-DASHED (2) j Click OK twice. d Under the Filter Rules.Plumbing to make it the active view.b In the Filters dialog. click Section. e In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Rename. i In the Line Graphics dialog. Vent piping throughout the plan appear as dashed green lines. and click OK. select Sanitary Vent. f In the Add Filters dialog. click the Color button. rename the filter Sanitary Vent. and click (Duplicate). select Sanitary from the Filters list. and click Override. 12 On the View tab on the Design Bar. and click OK. g For Sanitary Vent. select (green). and place a section above the urinals and toilets as shown. and click OK. h In the Line Graphics dialog. and in the Color dialog. c Right-click Sanitary 1. click Add. specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent. 384 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Create additional vents 11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 . and zoom in to view the urinals and toilets. for Pattern. click the Lines column. and click OK.

click to make the connection to the vent as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. and for Model Graphics Style. specify Wireframe. click Pipe. Adding Vents to the System | 385 . and enter the keyboard shortcut VG. verify the (Auto Connect) is selected. clear unwanted architectural components from the view as described previously. 20 At a point above the toilets. then drag the preview to the right and when the center snap for the previously created vent displays. and on the Options Bar. 18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view. for Detail Level. specify 2" for D (diameter). and enter 1/8" /12" for slope. click to specify the end of the first pipe section. specify Fine. 15 On the View Control Bar. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. 19 Begin drawing the vertical pipe. 16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

draw the pipe to the left to the open leg of the cross. 22 Right-click the new horizontal pipe. press Tab to display the connector. 386 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click Element Properties. c For D. under Instance Parameters. 24 Select the tee that was inserted when you connected the vents. d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Offset. and click the + control to update the tee to a cross. enter 9' 6" to specify the elevation for the reference end of the pipe. f Click Modify. The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe. and click to make the connection. specify 2". e If necessary.21 Click Modify. 25 Place another vent between the two rightmost urinals: a Click the midpoint of the pipe between the urinals. b Begin the vertical pipe.

use the Flip control to make the adjustment. 27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping.Plumbing to make it the active view. Adding Vents to the System | 387 .26 Double-click 3D .

388 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. 31 Right-click the tee. 30 While pressing Ctrl. and specify 9' 6" for Offset. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. 33 Click Modify. 29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. specify 2" for D (diameter). specify 2" for D (diameter). and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe. then click Apply. click Draw Pipe. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. move the cursor into the drawing area. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector.Add a vent to the sinks 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. and on the Options Bar. 32 On the Options Bar.

and click Finish. 35 Select the vent. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. Adding Vents to the System | 389 . click 39 Enter 1/8" /12" for slope. 38 Select the horizontal vent pipe. 37 Drag the pipe preview. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals.34 Zoom out to view the vents from the toilets and urinals and the new vent from the sinks. 36 On the Options Bar specify 0" /12" for slope. click Draw Pipe. (Slope). and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. and on the Routing Modify toolbar. right-click the connector at the open end. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint.

42 Click File menu ➤ Close. for New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Cold Water. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.40 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 2 Right-click Standard 1. and click OK. and click Duplicate. Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. 4 In the Rename dialog. Create the Cold Water System on page 390 to continue creating the plumbing system. click the Training Files icon. click Properties. right-click Standard. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click Rename. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. 41 You can save the open file if you wish. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Cold Water Piping. 390 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

click Branch. 21 On the Options Bar. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. and avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. which places the piping above the ceiling. 16 Press F9 to open the System Browser. You now have the cold water piping at 9' 3" and the hot water piping at 9' 0". then click Duplicate. click Check None. specify Tee For Tee. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. 20 While pressing Shift. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. and in the Name dialog. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. 11 In the left pane. Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Branch. and on the Options Bar click (Filter Selection). and click OK. click Main. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. and in the right pane. specify Pipe Straight Coupling: Standard 6 Click Apply. click View ➤ Piping. and in the right pane. then select Plumbing Fixtures. click Main. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. and double-click 2 .Plumbing to make it the active view.5 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). 10 In the left pane. The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe. Create the cold water system 15 In the Project Browser. specify Pipe Cross: Standard For Transition. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. specify Pipe Transition : Standard For Union. for Name. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 12 In the table. specify Pipe Tee: Standard For Tap. Create the Cold Water System | 391 . in the right pane. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. click the floor drain. enter Hot Water. in the right pane. 14 Click OK. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK twice. 13 In the left panel. 9 In the table. 17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. click Mechanical Settings. specify None For Cross. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. specify Pipe Elbow : Standard For Preferred Junction Type. 19 In the Filter dialog. 18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room.

25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 392 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Create piping for the cold water system 22 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. and in the Type Selector. 30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG. click Pipe. and click OK. 35 On the Plumbing tab. and click to specify the end the segment. 26 On the Options Bar. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and click to end the run as shown. click (Connect Into). 32 Select the middle sink in the view. 34 Zoom in on the area between the middle and rightmost sink. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. and on the Options Bar. 33 In the Select Connector dialog. specify 0" /12" for Slope. 23 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify 2' 6" for Offset. clear Casework. 24 On the Option Bar.The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. 31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. Piping is added to connect the sink to the cold water system. select the domestic cold water connector. click OK. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 29 Click Modify. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. click Pipe. click Show categories from all disciplines. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks.

43 Drag the preview to the left. just above the wall. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. drag the preview into the center of the wall behind the sinks. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. click to specify the end of the pipe. 37 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. and click to end that segment. and click Apply.) 41 On the Plumbing tab. click the snap on the cold water pipe. 42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase. 44 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Options Bar. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. specify 1' 2" for Offset.36 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the sinks. 39 Click Modify. specify 9' 3" for Offset. press Tab. Create the Cold Water System | 393 . select the cold water pipe. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. click Pipe. 40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. press Tab to avoid connecting to the sanitary piping. (If necessary.

394 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and when the center line for the left toilet displays. click to specify the endpoint as shown. 50 On the Plumbing tab. select the rightmost toilet. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and click the + control to change it to a tee.45 Click Modify. right-click the open connector.Plumbing. 52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle. 46 In the Project Browser. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. double-click 3D. 49 Select the elbow behind the toilet. 51 Select the tee. click Pipe. 47 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. 48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). click Draw Pipe.

and on the Options Bar click pipe. connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe.53 Click Modify. 55 Select the rightmost urinal. Create the Cold Water System | 395 . . 56 Use the same method. . 54 Select the leftmost toilet. and on the Options Bar click water pipe that you added to the tee. and click the horizontal cold Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click the vertical cold water Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.

as shown. The final steps in this exercise adjust the size of several sections of the piping. 58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. the tee. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D . and the horizontal segment to the sinks.All of the cold water piping is in place.Plumbing view as shown. 396 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). feeding the toilets and urinals (including the tees. Create the Cold Water System | 397 . 61 On the Options Bar. 60 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. 62 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. specify 2" for D (diameter). specify 1 1/2" for D (diameter).59 On the Options Bar. 63 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). as shown.

398 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 68 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 2 .Plumbing.rvt. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close.64 On the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 66 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 65 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. create the hot water system. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. specify 3/4" for D (diameter). and zoom in on the sinks. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Hot Water Piping. Create the Hot Water System on page 398.

and on the Options Bar. (Add to System). 15 On the Options Bar. and click to place the water heater as shown. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the water heater. click the Training Files icon. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. click Check None. click (Filter Selection). and click OK.rfa. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. and click View ➤ Piping. select Plumbing Fixtures. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. Create the Hot Water System | 399 . 10 Double-click Water Heater. expand Domestic Cold Water. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. 14 In the System Browser. expand Domestic Hot Water.2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. select Water Heater : 40Gallon. 6 On the Options Bar. click the title bar for the browser. and on the Edit 17 In the System Browser. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. and click Select. click System toolbar. click (Edit System). to the left of the main cold water pipe. 16 On the Edit System toolbar. and click Select. click Mechanical Equipment. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. 5 In the Filter dialog. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. The Edit System toolbar is activated. and in the Type Selector. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. click Finish. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar.

400 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. 19 Using the same method. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. click Draw Pipe. click (Connect Into). select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. specify 8' 6" for Offset. 20 Select the water heater in the view. click Pipe. 25 On the Options Bar. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. right-click the connector. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. and in the Type Selector. click (Edit System). click OK. 23 On the Plumbing tab. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. select the domestic cold water connector. and on the Options Bar.18 On the Options Bar. and click the main cold water pipe. click when the hot water connector displays. add the water heater to the cold water system.

select Pipe Types : Hot Water. specify 2' 8" for Offset. Create the Hot Water System | 401 .27 Click Modify. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. 31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. click Pipe. 30 On the Options Bar. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. and click to specify the end of the segment. 28 On the Plumbing tab. 33 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown.

click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. 38 On the Options Bar. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. click Apply. and click to end that segment. and In this case. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 39 Click Modify. click Draw Pipe. 40 In the Project Browser. click Pipe. 41 On the Plumbing tab. 36 Right-click the open connector. click click the hot water pipe below the sinks.Plumbing. specify 2' 8" for Offset. 402 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. (Connect Into). double-click 3D. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.34 Select the middle sink in the view. and on the Options Bar. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe.

46 You can save the open file if you wish. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view.42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. Create the Hot Water System | 403 . and click. 44 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 43 Click Modify.Plumbing. double-click 2 . This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close.

404 .

each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. if the link is lost.Fire Protection Systems 8 In this tutorial. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and select i Office Building. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. However. you will understand the process. In this tutorial. you create a wet and dry fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. and size and tag the pipes. Then. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you can choose to save your work. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2009. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. you create views and pipe types. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. As you create the systems. manually modify the pipes and fittings. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. insert fittings. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. At the end of this tutorial. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. In this lesson. If the tutorial datasets are not present. 405 . During the fire protection design process. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009.rvt. By following the recommended workflow. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. click Reload From. However. methodology. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. go to http://www. Designing Fire Protection Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. create schedules. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. and finally.

406 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Create new pipe types 1 In the Project Browser. 12 For System Type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Rename. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. including the new material property. for New. 8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. and click Properties.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. Open the i Starting the Fire Protection Project. and click Fire Protection. 9 In the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. Configure pipe conversion settings 10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. 3 Right-click the copy. right-click the Design Bar. and click OK.Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 With the Type Properties dialog open. select Fire Protection Wet. and click OK. for Material. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. select Carbon Steel. click Duplicate. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Next. enter Fire Protection Wet. select Main. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. click Mechanical Settings. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. You create new pipe types. and click Duplicate. 2 Right-click Standard. 11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Next. Next. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 13 Under System Type. 5 In the Rename dialog. you modify the pipe type properties.

18 Click OK. select Fire Protection Wet. for Offset verify 9' 0". and specify Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping. 15 For System Type. click Schedule/Quantities. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 407 . select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. 20 In the New Schedule dialog. duct. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. under Available fields. Create a Space Schedule 19 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. So. select it. However. do the following: ■ Under Category. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 14 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for System Type Fire Protection Dry. ■ ■ Define columns 21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 16 Under System Type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 22 While pressing Ctrl. verify that 9' 0" is specified. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. For Offset. select Spaces. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 23 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. verify that 9' 0" is selected. select Area. structural beams. and click Add. or architectural components. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Branch. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Click OK.■ For Offset. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. To remove a field. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. and click Remove. 17 Using the same method.

For Field formatting. select Level. verify that Common is selected. 408 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Create a calculated value parameter 25 Click Calculated Value. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. Verify that Formula is selected. verify that (none) is selected. 27 Click OK. For Formula. Verify that equals is selected. Under Level. 26 In the Calculated Value dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. For Discipline. For Then by. click Field Format. verify that Number is selected. verify that (none) is selected. 29 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 130 square feet.24 Select a field. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. Verify that Ascending is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Type. 30 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Minimum Sprinklers. enter Area/130. select Number. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. For And. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level 2. Organize the data 28 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each space.

Finally. sorted according to space number. In the next exercise. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Next. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal places. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. select Fixed. As a result. Placing Sprinklers on page 410. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 409 . 32 You can save the open file if you wish. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. you created a Space Schedule for fire protection systems. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings.31 In the Format dialog. A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select 2 decimal places. you created new views and modified view properties. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. you place the wet system sprinklers. In this exercise. Click OK twice. For Rounding. For Units. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project.

there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. select Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 1/2" Pendent. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Open the i Placing Sprinklers. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. When there is a small misalignment. Place a sprinkler 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. 5 On the Options Bar. When this happens. and double-click 2 . the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. 4 In the Type Selector. and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). 410 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . After placing the initial sprinkler. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. You will use the schedule that you created in the previous exercise to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. As you place the sprinklers. 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the spaces on level 2. 2 Enter ZR. click Sprinkler.

and click to place the sprinkler. Continue placing sprinklers 8 In the drawing area. click to specify the copy start point. and that Copy is selected. and after the intersection snap displays. 10 On the Options Bar.6 With the view zoomed. click (Copy). Placing Sprinklers | 411 . 7 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tile as shown. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). select the sprinkler that you placed. The selected sprinkler displays in red. You copy this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. 11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. 9 On the Edit toolbar. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process.

Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. The copy selection border follows the cursor. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). 412 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering.12 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. click to specify the copy end point.

Copy and array sprinklers 13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately below Office 201).A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. verify Constrain is cleared. and select Multiple. Copy is selected. and after the intersection snap displays. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 202. 15 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy). 17 In Office 201. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. click to specify the copy start point. Placing Sprinklers | 413 . Next. 14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201. 16 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected.

18 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 202. 414 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays.

19 Move the cursor directly down. Placing Sprinklers | 415 . and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.

The sprinklers are placed. 416 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

Clear Group And Associate. Furthermore.20 On the Design Bar. you array the other Office 202 sprinklers. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Edit toolbar. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. click (Array). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. select Last. because all of the sprinklers in Office 202 are equally spaced. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. For Move To. click Modify. 21 While pressing CTRL. Verify that Constrain is cleared. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). it is an ideal situation to use an array. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202. Placing Sprinklers | 417 . Next.

and after the intersection snap displays. to specify array end point. You first specify an array start point. and after the intersection snap displays. An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. creating an array is a 2-step process.NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. 24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202 sprinkler. click to specify the array end point as shown. click to specify the array start point. 25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). 418 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

Placing Sprinklers | 419 .The Office 202 sprinklers are placed.

420 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the copy start point. 30 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. 29 On the Options Bar. and after the mid point snap displays. A border displays around the selected sprinklers indicating the copy selection. you place sprinklers in Office 203. 28 On the Edit toolbar. 26 Zoom out to view all 3 offices along the left wall.Next. click (Copy). 27 While pressing Ctrl. clear Multiple. select both sprinklers in the corner office (Office 201).

31 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 203. Placing Sprinklers | 421 . and after the mid point snap displays. click to specify the copy end point.

NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. 422 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps.

Next. Open 204. 35 On the Edit toolbar.You have now placed the sprinklers for 3 offices. you place sprinklers in the large common space. Open 204. 32 Click Modify. click (Copy). You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array. 37 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. 34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler. 36 On the Options Bar. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area. Placing Sprinklers | 423 . verify that Multiple is cleared.

click to place the sprinkler. 39 Click Modify. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. Next. but creating an array is quicker. You could copy sprinklers. 41 On the Edit toolbar. The Office 203 sprinkler is copied to Open 204. For Move To. and after the intersection snap displays. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. enter 6 for the number of arrays. 424 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. For Number. select 2nd. 42 On the Options Bar. click (Array).38 Move the cursor to the right into Open 204 as shown. 40 Select the sprinkler that you copied.

The array is created. click to specify the array end point as shown. Zoom out to display the array. and after the intersection snap displays. Placing Sprinklers | 425 .44 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right.

select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204 space.IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. 426 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . For Move To. click to specify end point for the second array. 47 On the Options Bar. Next. click (Array). 46 On the Edit toolbar. you create multiple arrays based on this array. 45 While pressing CTRL. and after the intersection snap displays. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. verify that 2nd is selected. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. enter 4 for number of arrays. 48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler as shown. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. If you make a mistake placing the array. For Number. undo the step and try again. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array.

Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. click Expand. click the check box associated with each warning. 50 In the Revit MEP 2009 dialog. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 204 is complete Placing Sprinklers | 427 . and click Delete Checked to delete the 3 sprinklers. 51 Expand the 3 Warnings. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors.The arrays are created.

Fire Prot to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). and click Modify. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. 428 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . you place a sprinkler in the Mechanical/Electrical space.rfa file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder. first. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. you need to load them in the project. move the cursor to the approximate center of the space. 56 Enter ZR. The sprinkler family loads into the project. Because this space does not have a ceiling. However. Place non-hosted sprinklers 55 In the Project Browser.Next. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright. and double-click 2 . 59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. Load a new sprinkler family 52 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. click Sprinkler. 54 Open the Sprinkler -Upright. click the Training Files icon. you will use a non-hosted sprinkler. 57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click to place the sprinkler. To modify a family type. 58 In the Type Selector. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. 53 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Do not click the vertical line that displays as the reference. 67 Select the dimension.Ceiling Fire Prot. and notice that the sprinkler displays in the Mechanical/Electrical space. for Offset. and on the Options Bar. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the 2 .Ceiling Fire Prot view. Unconstrain the sprinkler when deleting the dimension. and click Element Properties. 63 In the Project Browser. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. click Dimension. double-click 2 . enter 10' 6". under Instance Parameters. and when a dot displays click to specify the center. Placing Sprinklers | 429 . click the center of the sprinkler. as shown. and because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. then click the wall face of the lower wall. 64 On the Design Bar. 62 Click OK. 66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. and move the dimension to the left.The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler. and press Delete. 60 Right-click the sprinkler. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. select Wall Faces 65 Click the upper wall face. Next you adjust the offset.

Click to place the sprinklers on ceiling tile faces. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. center the sprinkler between the right and left walls. Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 69 Using the placement methods that you have learned. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. then click Modify.68 Using the same method. You will create a Fire Protection Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise. Round decimals up to the next whole number. NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Use sprinkler type: Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 1/2" Pendent for all rooms. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. 430 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

click to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. (Pin) 72 In the Filter dialog. and click (Filter). 73 You can save the open file if you wish. and on the toolbar. click Check None. then select Sprinklers. double-click 2 .70 In the Project Browser. Placing Sprinklers | 431 . 71 Draw a pick box around the entire model.Fire Prot.

Open the i Connecting Sprinklers. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. After creating the logical connection. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. Unlike logical connections (systems). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. and double-click 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. However.Fire Prot to make it the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. and physically with piping. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. In this exercise. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. 432 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .74 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Then you simplify the layout using tools from the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar to modify pipe branches after converting the initial layout to piping. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. Connecting the Sprinklers on page 432. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.

Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. 4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. If the System Browser does not respond. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. select Sprinklers. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. 7 In the Filter box. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. click System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 8 On the Options Bar.Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and display pinned and in red. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected. 6 On the Options Bar. click in the drawing area to make it active. then press F9. and click OK. Connecting the Sprinklers | 433 . click Check None. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211.

It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. and a piping layout preview displays. Next. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. In the System Browser. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. place the cursor over a sprinkler. select an initial piping layout. under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. right-click Fire Protection Wet. and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser. press Tab. named Fire Protection Wet 1.The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. expand Piping. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. 434 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and click Select. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1.

19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. verify that 6"150 mm is specified for D. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. (Layout Path) button is available on the Options Bar whenever a system component 13 On the Design Bar. enter -12' 0". and select solution 4. 22 On the Options Bar. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Place Base. click Solutions. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 435 . and on the Options Bar. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. click Settings. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. these settings will convert the base component to a 6" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Branch. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right keyboard arrow keys. and for Offset. 21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell. 20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model.NOTE The is selected. and click to place the base component as shown. 17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. verify that Main is selected. verify that 9' 0" is specified. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click Solutions. The layout path solution displays. 23 On the Design Bar. When the layout is finished. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. 18 Click OK. Click (Previous Solution). For Offset. 15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet.

Next. you modify the selected layout. 436 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Modify. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 25 Zoom in on the vertical main. A (parallel movement control) displays. Modify the layout 24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 26 Select the vertical layout path segment. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. In general. then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.

28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211. Connecting the Sprinklers | 437 . and midway between the sprinklers above the office as shown.27 Drag the parallel movement control to the left to a point to the right of the doorway for Office 216.

30 Select the horizontal branch pipe. select the horizontal branch again. (elbow junction control) The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area. 438 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .29 Drag the parallel movement control down until the pipe merges with the horizontal piping to the left. and drag the down to merge it with the horizontal piping below. feeding the sprinkler in Office 203. 31 Drag the it. (tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below 32 Scroll to the left. as shown.

Next you combine the piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately. Thin lines make it easier to see the various drag controls when using junction and elbow controls. whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler. it is an opportunity to merge the piping into a shared branch. 36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths. So far. In general. you have been using parallel movements to combine piping. 34 Select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in the left office. Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping.33 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. 35 On the toolbar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 439 . You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools. 37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above. as shown. click (Thin Lines). However.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. (elbow junction control) up to combine 39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 440 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Either relocate the system components. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. and drag the the branch piping. click Finish Layout.38 Select the horizontal branch again. select a different layout solution. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 441 . and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler 47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown. click draw pipe. (Connect Into). including the cross and transitions from the main piping. and verify that (Auto Connect) is selected on the Options Bar. 43 Press Delete. click in Office 211. as shown. click to specify the end point.Continue combining piping 40 Zoom in on Office 211. clear Sprinklers. click (Filter). 45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays. as shown. 44 Select the horizontal pipe. and the sprinkler in the open area. on the Options Bar. 46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted. 41 On the Options Bar. right-click the connector at the open end. and click OK. draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. 42 In the Filter dialog. then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler.

Reconnect the sprinklers in Office 214 and 216 52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216.48 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. as shown. 50 While pressing Ctrl. and press Delete. 49 Draw a pick box around the horizontal piping and fittings between the sprinklers in Office 216 and the main in Server Room 215. 53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216. including the pipe and the tee as shown. and drag the top connector up to connect with the horizontal piping in the open area. and drag the connector to the right to connect with the vertical pipe as shown. 51 Press Delete. select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214. 442 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

then drag the preview to the connector snap on the right-most sprinkler. and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal pipe. click to specify the end point for the pipe. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to make the connection to the sprinkler. 55 On the Design Bar. click Pipe. ■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers. Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler. Click Modify. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 443 . verify that (Auto Connect) is selected.54 Zoom in on the office in the lower-right corner. Drag the preview down.

click (Connect Into). and on the toolbar click 57 Click each of the open-ended pipes. 444 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . (Trim/Extend). On the Options Bar. and click the horizontal pipe as shown. ■ Reconnect the piping for Office 214 to the main 56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215.■ Select the sprinkler to the left.

and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping. Check pipe connectivity 59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and converted pipe fittings. 2 Zoom in.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.Fire Prot view. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. The entire system should be highlighted. and press Tab twice. you add the sprinklers in the upper half of the model to the existing wet system. In this exercise. 58 Click Modify. 61 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After creating the system. you create the dry fire protection system. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. Open the i Completing the Wet System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 445 . click the Training Files icon. 60 You can save the open file if you wish. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. Next. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click the 2 . 1 In the Project Browser.An elbow is inserted to complete the connection. and then you create piping to physically connect them. checked connectivity. In the next exercise. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 445. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. indicating connectivity throughout the system. expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 62 Proceed to the next exercise.

select a pipe segment. and so on) are logically connected by a system. and AC units.3 Click the plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a cross.Fire Prot view. and pipe or duct is created. such as VAV boxes. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. or sprinkler in the current wet system. you can select the pipe or duct. 4 In the 2 . 446 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The Edit System toolbar displays providing system editing tools. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). air terminals. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and number of elements in the system. system equipment. The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the upper half of the model. mechanical equipment. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). 5 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. fitting. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. System tools display on the Options Bar. radiators. boilers.

You cannot select them. click 7 On the Options Bar. verify that 30 is specified. 9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. For System Equipment. verify that None is specified. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. For System Name. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 447 . For Number of Elements. 8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected.6 On the Edit System toolbar. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. Select Multiple. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add To System). Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out).

The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor. click Finish to finish editing the system. you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the selections. click Paths). and click Modify. and on the Options Bar. (Layout 448 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 11 On the Edit System toolbar. solution 1 3. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 10 NOTE When you use multiple selections.The selected sprinklers display in red. for Solution Type. On the Options Bar. select Network. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model. Number of Elements now displays as 65 (sprinklers) in the system. click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the system. verify that Solutions is selected. 13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. On the Options Bar.

The layout automatically provides a path from the upper layout to the cross created earlier. 17 Select the vertical branch again. 15 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the model. and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the branch piping as shown. 16 Select the vertical pipe to the lower sprinkler in the corner office (201). and drag the tee junction control to the intersection to the left as shown. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 449 .

as shown. 450 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .18 Scroll to the right and select the branch to the lower-right sprinkler in Office 208. Click the tee junction control again and continue the adjustment. 19 Using the same method. The piping for the upper half of the model displays. drag each end of the branch to the left to combine it with the piping to the sprinkler just to above. 20 On the Design Bar. The tee junction control will stop at the junction of the tee from the main piping. click Finish Layout.

you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing system. After creating the system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In the next exercise. and press Tab 3 times. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. For this exercise. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. 22 You can save the open file if you wish. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. indicating connectivity throughout the system. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. you create the dry fire protection system. The entire system should be highlighted. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 215. a valve would isolate the dry system from the wet system. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. and the pipes for this system would not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire.Check pipe connectivity 21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell. In an actual dry system. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 451. it is enough show how the system is created without adding a valve. and checked connectivity. As with the wet system. In this exercise. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 451 .

click the Training Files icon. Place sprinklers 2 Zoom in to view the 3 spaces at the bottom of the model. and double-click 2 .Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If necessary. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 216. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. press Tab until the sprinkler displays on the status bar at the lower left corner of the window.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Be careful to select only the sprinkler.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 452 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Open the i Creating the Dry System.

5 On the Options Bar. then move the cursor diagonally to the upper-right. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.4 On the Edit toolbar. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. 8 Click Modify. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 453 . Verify that Copy is selected. 7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215. click to specify the copy start point. along the same horizontal ceiling grid. as shown. click (Copy). 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection.

select both Server Room 215 sprinklers. verify that 1/2" is selected. Create the dry system 9 While pressing CTRL. 14 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter).Pendent . select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. 454 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Pipe. click System Browser. select Sprinkler . expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. 10 In the Type Selector. For Slope.Next. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. 19 On the Options Bar. 13 In the System Browser. and click Select The selected system displays in red. The System Browser opens. 11 On the Options Bar. 16 Zoom in on Server Room 215. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. verify that 9' 0" is specified.Hosted : 1/2" Dry Pendent. you change the sprinkler type. For Offset. Create the dry system piping 15 In the Project Browser. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red.Dry . click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign the sprinklers to it. 17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. double-click 2 . enter 1/8" / 12". Confirm and validate the system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. The system is created and listed in the System Browser.Fire Prot to make it the active view. 18 In the Type Selector.

when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays. 22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and. click to connect the pipe. and click. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 455 . Do not connect to the upper right sprinkler. as shown.20 Click the horizontal pipe directly above the upper-right sprinkler. to specify a starting point for the piping 21 Draw the pipe preview straight down to a point even with the lower-left sprinkler.

for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click All. Next. The pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper-right sprinkler. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. select any category. under Instance Parameters. and clear the Lines category. click All. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show categories from all disciplines. and zoom in on the dry fire protection system. and click View Properties. 28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines. 25 Right-click an empty area in the drawing area. Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view. Click OK twice. expand Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 3D Views. and clear a check mark from any category. All categories are cleared. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. 456 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . on the Model Categories tab. All categories are selected except the Lines category. click Edit. You can confirm this in the 3D view or by checking connectivity. and double-click 3D. click None. as shown. 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.23 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool.

The sprinkler connects into the pipe. To follow good design practice. The slope value displays next to the slope control. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 457 .30 Select the unconnected sprinkler. click . 31 On the Options Bar. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. You can click the slope control to change the reference end for the slope. and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. 32 Zoom the view.

you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 215. you placed dry system sprinklers. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 2 If necessary. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser.Fire Prot to make the view active. You have completed the dry fire protection system. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise.Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 33 Zoom out to display the entire model. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. and press TAB 3 times. Additionally. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. highlight a pipe segment in the dry system. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. and double-click 3D to make the view active. checked pipe connectivity. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Open the i Modifying Pipe Diameters. Then. Modifying Pipe Diameters on page 458. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that they are connected. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 458 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP When you tile 2 views. the active view is tiled to the left. First.

and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. or height. In the 2. and click OK. height. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 459 . click .Fire Prot view. width. click Check None. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 7 On the Options Bar. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Changing the diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs. or width. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. width. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP.You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection piping. 8 In the Filter dialog. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter.

verifying that it is connected. the elbow and the horizontal pipe to the main piping to remove them from the selection. 11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 1 inch diameter on the Options Bar. 460 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 1 inch diameter except for the supply piping. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. 12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment. and press TAB twice. select 1". zoom in on the supply pipe in the stairwell. and while pressing SHIFT. select the supply pipe in the stairwell.9 Click in the 3D view to make it active. 10 On the Options Bar. for D: (diameter).

click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving.Modify the diameter of the main 13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model. If branch segments are selected. select the model. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 461 . and on the toolbar. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection.

and the supply pipe. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. 462 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . the pipe fittings. while pressing CTRL.14 With the main selected.

and on the View Control Bar. Sprinklers Serviced 1. NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings. for Detail Level.The main piping is selected and displays in red. 19 Validate the pipe run geometry. use the pipes and pipe fittings. for D: 6". The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire protection systems. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 15 On the Options Bar. especially around the pipe fittings. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 463 . select Fine. for D. and for Model Graphics Style. Modify the diameter of branch pipes 20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. (Filter) to select only 16 Double-click the 3D view. select Shading with Edges. select 4". select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main. 18 On the Options Bar. 17 In the 3D view. 2 3 4.

21 Click in the 2 . 26 Select the next pipe segment and tee to the right. 23 On the View Control Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as shown. and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215). select Fine and for Model Graphics Style. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 offices in the building. for D:. The pipe diameter is modified. for Detail. 464 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements. The specifications requires a diameter of 2" for this pipe segment. Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection. 22 Enter ZR.Fire Prot view to make it active. select 2". select Shading with Edges.

select 1 1/2". Modifying Pipe Diameters | 465 . Next. 28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view.This segment services 4 sprinklers. 27 On the Options Bar. zoom in on the piping to Office 216. and on the Options Bar. It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view. 29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch. for D: select 1 1/2". you continue to modify the pipe branch. for D:.

38 Place the cursor over the vertical supply pipe in the stairwell. for D: select 1 1/4". zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step. and on the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. you place a tag and include a leader line. and after the segment highlights. 466 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. verify that Pipe Size Tag is loaded. 33 On the Options Bar. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. press Tab until the pipe is highlighted place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. for Pipes. click Tag ➤ By Category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. click to place the tag. Clear Leader. 35 Click OK. under Category. NOTE Tags are view specific. select Leader.30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Click Tags. Next. Tag the pipes 31 In the 2 Fire Prot view. 36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main. 34 In the Tag dialog.

and finish placing the pipe tags. Next.39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 467 . 40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. Sprinklers Serviced 1. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. and finish tagging the pipes. Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. 2 3 4.

you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. You can save the open file if you wish. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. The completed fire protection system is included in the i Completed Fire Protection System. 468 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this tutorial. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You added tags the pipes. For additional practice. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close.42 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. In this exercise. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe.

After learning to modify an existing family. and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. you should have a working knowledge of Revit MEP and experience with the actual components that you will be modeling. telephone. it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline. ■ ■ NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections. Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular 469 . Before using this tutorial. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. pipe fittings. Revit MEP operation and the behavior of your components depends to a great extent on how you create specific components. Revit MEP Content The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors.Creating Revit MEP Content 9 This tutorial expands your knowledge of the Family Editor by introducing several unique features in Revit MEP. including power. as after this selection is made. you use the Family Editor to modify and create tags and annotation symbols. duct fittings. Steam. you begin by modifying existing families to create new types. and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids. you create a new lighting fixture and 2 pipe fittings. The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family. In the third lesson. ■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork. alarm systems and others. Family Editor Creating a family requires careful thought. In this tutorial. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. not only for the geometry. but also to understand how the settings in the Family Editor affect the family. medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Pipe connectors are used for piping. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly.

At times. open it in the Family Editor. instead of creating a new one. for Rounding. or plumbing component. although it may be easier to modify an existing family. navigate to a folder of your choice. For example. Define shared parameters. Create formulas for parameters. The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall design. Finally.rfa. Place connectors. click the Training Files icon. Modifying Families In this lesson. you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families. 2 In the Save As dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor Exhaust Ventilator . select 1 decimal place. electrical. Set project units 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Map parameters Create multiple types within a family.Downblast. it is easier to modify a component. click the Format column. 7 Save the family. and click OK. 6 Click OK to close the Project Units window. the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space. 470 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Electrical. and save the family as Exhaust Ventilator . You can modify an existing component. If you can find a component that is similar to the family that you want. there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of attempting to create a single family with types to address every application. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. modify it as needed. you may want to create multiple types within the existing family instead of creating a new family. Modifying a Fan Family In this exercise you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modify an existing family. and for Current. for Discipline.mechanical.rfa. and then load it into the project. You can create a component from scratch. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family. 5 In the Format dialog.Downblast . There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save a copy of the family 1 Click File ➤ Save As.

Create Shared Parameters 8 On the Design Bar. enter MEP. click New. Shared_Parameters) for the shared parameter file. Click Yes. 15 For Name. under Parameters. Add shared parameters to the Family Type 21 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select the Type option. The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category. 12 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. enter Motor HP For Discipline. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 16 Under Parameters. 17 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. 23 In the Family Types dialog. click New. and click Create. click Add. enter Text 18 Click OK. enter Common For Type. 11 If you have not already created a shared parameter file. 14 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select the Shared parameter option. for Group parameter under. select the Electrical Engineering. enter a File name (for example. To reuse this tutorial. click Add. and click Select. you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous step. and click Select. and click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. and click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this tutorial. select Motor FLA. click the Shared parameter option. Modifying a Fan Family | 471 . under Groups. 19 Using the same method. under Parameters. and click OK. you will be prompted to choose a file from another project or to create a new file. 24 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Family Types 9 In the Family Types dialog. 13 Browse to a folder. create additional shared parameters with the following properties: Name Voltage Motor FLA Power Phase Number of Poles Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Electrical Type Electrical Potential Current Power Integer Number of Poles 20 Click OK.

under Parameters. enter the following formula: Voltage * Motor FLA * sqrt(if(Phase = 3. as defined below: Parameter Phase Number of Poles Motor HP Power Group Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Type Type Type Type Create a parameter formula to calculate power 28 In the Formula column for Power. and click OK.8 7. add the following shared parameters to the family type. 31 Click OK. enter 1/6 HP . 33 Using the same method. 27 Using the same method. select Electrical Engineering. and click OK.460 V .5 4.115 V .4 Motor HP = 1/6 The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified.8 Motor HP 1 2 3 34 Click OK.3 Ph 3 HP . 1)) NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters you created. 472 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 32 Specify the following values for the shared parameters in the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage = 115 Phase = 1 Number of Poles = 1 Motor FLA = 4.208 V .3 Ph Voltage 208 208 460 Phase 1 3 3 Number of Poles Motor FLA 2 3 3 8. select Voltage.1 Ph 2 HP .1 Ph. select the Type option. create additional Family Types with the following parameter values: Name 1 HP . for Group parameter under. for Parameter Group. 3. select MEP. Create New Family Types 29 Under Family Types. 35 Save the family. 30 For Name. under Parameter Data.25 In the Shared Parameters dialog.208 V . 26 In the Parameter Properties. click New.

See Connectors on page 561.Add an electrical connector 36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems. system type. press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of the fan is highlighted. telephone. The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in a power system. 40 Click Modify Modifying a Fan Family | 473 . 39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on the center of the face. while pressing Shift. 38 On the Options Bar. click Electrical Connector. select Power . NOTE If necessary.Balanced. 37 On the Design Bar. alarm systems and others. Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane. See Connector Placement on page 567. Click and drag the View Cube at the upper right corner of the view to spin the ventilator as shown. TIP You can also hold the right mouse button. and dragging the cursor to spin a model. and verify that is selected. including power. number of poles and the same voltage specified. Connections between components in a power system must have connectors with the same.

54 Click Window menu ➤ Exhaust Ventilator . in the = column. click 46 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select HVAC.rfa to make the family the active view. select Voltage. and observe the values in the Type Parameters 62 For Type.) Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family This exercise demonstrates using various settings on the electrical connector to define a fan powered box with variable power requirements for electric heat and motor size. 43 Select the Electrical connector created in the previous section. 474 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .460 V . and in the Type Selector. and click OK. select Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 On the Design Bar. for Voltage. The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types. (The exact location is not important. click Mechanical Equipment. It also demonstrates the use of shared parameters and parameter mapping. and click OK. click . 64 Save the family. (It is not necessary to save the i Sample Project. click Load into Projects. 44 On the Options Bar.rvt displays in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar.rvt file. Flex the part 51 Click File menu ➤ Open. click list. 57 In the Project Browser.Map Parameter Values to Connector 41 On the Design Bar. and again observe the Type Parameter values. 42 In the Family Types dialog. for Load Classification. specify an associated family parameter for the following parameters: Parameter Number of Poles Apparent Load Associated (shared) Parameter Number of Poles Power 48 Under Electrical Loads.Mech. for Name. 61 Select the fan.3 Ph. 50 Save the family.) 60 Click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 58 On the Mechanical Design Bar.rvt. 56 The i Sample Project. 47 Using the same method. 49 Click OK. select 3 HP . click the Training Files icon. click Family Types. . 53 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph. 63 Click OK.Downblast. and double-click 2 . 59 Move the cursor into the drawing area and click to add the Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. 52 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

enter Apparent Power Phase 1. click Add. select MEP. select Electrical. The MEP group was created in the Modifying a Fan Family exercise and the parameters created in that exercise are listed under Parameters. for Parameter group. 6 In the Family Types dialog. click Edit Family. 5 Click Family Types.rvt. select Power.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Discipline. and double-click 1 . click New. select the Shared parameter option. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Yes when prompted to open the family for editing. 11 Under Parameters. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 470. Open the family and create parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Shared Parameters dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. 10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. you will need to complete that exercise to create shared parameters that are used in this exercise. 9 Click Edit. click the Training Files icon. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 475 . 2 Select the VAV box. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Power. select MEP. and click Select. for Parameter group. It this is not the case. go back and complete the previous Modifying a Fan Family exercise. under Parameters. For Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise.

21 Using the same method. verify that Size 2 . 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter 3. 19 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. select Apparent Power Phase 2. select Apparent Power Phase 1. select Electrical Engineering. 15 In the Shared Parameters dialog. Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter name. under Parameters. select the Instance option. and click OK 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog.6 inch Inlet is selected for Name. and click OK. and click OK. enter 480. for Group parameter under. add the following shared parameters to the family type. for Group parameter under. select Electrical Engineering. For Phase. under Parameter Data. as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor FLA Motor HP Motor On Phase Number of Poles Phase Voltage Group parameter under Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Instance Instance Type Type Instance Type Type Type 22 In the Family Types dialog. Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering group in the Family Types dialog. 23 In the Formula column. and click Select. 17 In the Family Types dialog. select the Instance option. under Parameter Data. click Add.13 Using the same method. create the following additional shared parameters as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor On Phase Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Type Power Power Power Integer 14 Click OK. specify formulas for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Voltage. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select the Shared parameter option. 476 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

enter 3.9 3. Motor FLA * 277 V.6 inch Inlet VAV: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. For Apparent Power Phase 3. Place connector and map parameters 31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown. For Motor FLA. 24 Under Electrical Engineering. Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered when you created the parameters.8 inch Inlet type: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles.3. click new. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1. For Motor HP. 27 In the Family Types dialog. For Motor HP.8 inch Inlet. For Motor On Phase. enter 1. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2. 0 VA). and click OK. For Motor On Phase. For Motor FLA. 0 VA).2 5. enter Size 3 . specify the following parameter values for the Size 2 . enter 1/6. enter 1/4. enter 1. in the Value column. specify the following parameters for the Size 3 . enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 3. enter 2. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 477 . For Apparent Power Phase 2. ■ ■ NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. 0 VA).4 29 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog. create additional types.rfa. enter 1.2. and specify the parameters for each size listed below: Name Number of Poles 3 3 3 Motor On Motor HP Phase (Default) 1 1 1 1/3 1/2 3/4 Motor FLA Size 4 – 10 inch Inlet Size 5 – 12 inch Inlet Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet 2. 30 Save the family as Parallel Fan Powered VAV. 26 In the Name dialog. 28 Using the same method. Motor FLA * 277 V. 25 Under Family Types. Motor FLA * 277 V. enter 3.■ For Apparent Power Phase 1.

For Voltage. click in the column. click in the column. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog.Unbalanced. select Power . select ■ ■ For Apparent Load Phase 1. specify values for the following parameters: ■ For Number of Poles. and click to add the connector on the face. select Apparent Power Phase 2. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 478 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK. select Number of Poles. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. select Apparent Power Phase 1. and on the Options Bar. and verify that is selected. click in the column. 33 On the Options Bar. click Electrical Connector. 36 Select the connector. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog.32 On the Design Bar. column. For Apparent Load Phase 2. 34 Highlight the large face on the controls box. 35 Click Modify. click . and click OK. and click OK. click in the Voltage.

. The loads on phases A. 45 Click Modify. For System Type. 42 In the Project Browser. verify that Power .■ For Apparent Load Phase 3. select panel HA. 50 Select panel HA. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. and specify the following parameters: ■ For Motor On Phase. click 44 Click (Create Power Circuit). enter 1. select Override parameter values of existing types. enter 2. 49 Click OK. 48 In the Element Properties dialog.6 inch Inlet is selected in the Type Selector. click Load into Projects. 41 If prompted. and C are 2512.Power.Unbalanced is selected. respectively. 43 Select the VAV box. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Apparent Power Phase 3. 51 Click OK. and click . click (Edit Circuit on Panel). and 1000. and click Yes. for Panel. 1000. and on the Options Bar. enter 3000. 46 Select the VAV box. 47 Verify that Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 2 . and click . and double-click 1 . click in the column. and on the Options Bar. 39 Save the family. and on the Options Bar. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. Flex the family 40 On the Design Bar. For Electric Heat Power. B. For Load Classification. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. select Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet. 52 Select the VAV box. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ For Motor On Phase. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 479 . for Type. enter HVAC. ■ ■ 38 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog.

59 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so you can see the air supply connector. enter 11000.rfa. 62 Click OK. and click Yes. 64 If prompted. 54 Click OK. verify that Calculated is selected for Flow Configuration. and C have updated to 4819. 66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room. 57 Click OK. 63 On the Design Bar. 4027. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. under Mechanical. click Load into Projects. 55 Click Modify. The loads on phases A.Mech. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. Create a supply air system 65 In the Project Browser. (Create (Select Equipment for System). as shown. click . click . select 480 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and double-click 1 . Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV 58 Click Window menu ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV. respectively. and on the Options Bar click Supply Air System). select Override parameter values of existing types. 60 Select the supply air connector. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. B. 56 Select panel HA.■ For Electric Heat Power. 67 On the Options Bar. click the VAV box. and 3667. and on the Options Bar. When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. and in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar.

and on the Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 481 . For Maximum Flex Duct Length.Round is selected. For Offset enter 9' 0". verify the following Main and Branch settings: Main ■ ■ For Duct Type. Branch ■ ■ ■ ■ For Duct Type. to select layout 6 of 6. click Finish Layout. For Flex Duct Type. and click Settings. 70 Click OK 71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.68 Click (Layout Paths). For Offset enter 9' 0". click Design Bar. enter 6' 0". 69 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. Ductwork is created for the selected solution. verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex .

and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 600 CFM. enter 300.6 X 20 gpm). 77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV.72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser. Using the combination of Preset and System settings on connectors lets you distribute flow according to the demands of a particular space. This allows specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem. 76 Click OK. the new sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals. 79 In the Element Properties dialog.4 specified for Flow and the other with 0. Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated.4 X 20 gpm). with the total for all downstream components equal to 1. The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component.6 specified for Flow. 80 Click OK. When Flow Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active. 73 In the System Browser. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow. and the other would receive a flow of 12 gpm (0. and press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal. 75 In the Element Properties dialog. In this case the first downstream zone would receive a flow of 8 gpm (0. and select Properties. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. 482 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV: Size 2 . a boiler may have its supply preset to 20 gpm (system supply = 20 gpm) and the connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System. and select Properties. 74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 750 CFM. The Flow Factor parameter is specified as a value between 0 and 1. but one with 0. 78 Again.6 inch Inlet VAV. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 600 CFM (4 X 150 CFM). For example.

Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorLighting and Appliance Panelboard . click .rfa. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify a 208V/3Ph panel to create a 240V/3Ph family.rfa. For Voltage. you modify existing electrical equipment families to create new families.Surface. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family. Modify an existing panel family 1 In the Project Browser. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Number of Poles. 5 Click OK. enter 2. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Training Files icon.NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector. The final section demonstrates how to load.240V MCB . 3 On the Options Bar. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and in the following section you modify a 480V/3Ph primary transformer to create a 480V/1Ph to 240V/1Ph secondary transformer. and then map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project. enter 240.Surface. To create unequal percentages for several downstream subsystems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. select the connector. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 483 . and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. and then you use the new families in a project. under Electrical . all instances of the family in a project will have the same factor. and connect components of the newly created families in a simple project. 7 In the Save As dialog.208V MCB . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 81 Close the Family and Sample Project files.Loads. Modifying Electrical Equipment In this exercise. 2 In the drawing area. In the first section. insert.

10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 2. Next. Primary Number of Poles is 2. except for 15 kVA. 12 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click Electrical. click Family Types. 13 For Name. 24 Click File ➤ Save As. 29 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room.5 kVA. 30 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. 15 Using the same method. Modify an existing transformer family 9 Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. 18 Click Apply.480-208-120V . you use the modified families in a project. 16 In the Family Types dialog. you create a new family type.rfa. 20 In the Name dialog. for Primary Number of Poles. 14 Under Family Types.480V Primary. 21 Under Electrical. enter 0' 8 5/8" NOTE You must enter 0 for the foot value. Next. click the Training Files icon. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Length. NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar. enter 3 kVA. 11 Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorDry Type Transformers . you modify an existing family type. verify that 15 kVA is selected. for Name. enter 0' 10 1/2" For Width.rfa. click Delete. Otherwise. In the following sections. click New. 28 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the inch value will be applied to the foot value. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Single Phase Transformer . 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. right-click the Design Bar. Load the new panel and transformer families into a project 27 Click File menu ➤ Open. 17 Under Electrical. delete all of the remaining types. Notice that the new family type is selected for Name. click Electrical Equipment. select 112. 23 Click OK.8 Click File menu ➤ Close.NEMA Type 2. verify the following: ■ ■ Primary Voltage is 480.rvt. 22 Under Dimensions. for Name. 25 In the Save As dialog. 484 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 0' 6 1/2" For Height. 19 Under Family Types.00 V.

and double-click 1 . click Electrical Equipment.rfa and Single Phase Transformer . You can also click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.480V Primary.240V MCB . select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .rfa. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult. 37 Using the same method. and click Open. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 485 . The new families are loaded into the project.31 On the Options Bar. navigate to the folder where you saved the new families.240V MCB . and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment in the Project Browser.Surface. click Load. 35 In the Type Selector. Test the new electrical equipment in a project 33 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. then while pressing CTRL. NOTE The panel is a wall-hosted family—it can only be placed on a wall. click to place the panel on the wall as shown.Power to make it the active view.Surface : 100A. do the following: ■ Place a Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel on the wall to the right of the first panel. 32 In the Open dialog. 36 Move the cursor over the wall.

48 In the drawing area. 46 In the right pane. 44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and click OK.Loads. 41 With the panel selected. Create a system 39 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. A new row is added in the right pane. do the following: For Secondary Distribution System. For Phase. 47 Click OK. For Distribution System Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select 480 Wye. click ■ ■ ■ ■ .Loads. select 120/240 Single. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. select 3. For L-L Voltage. click Electrical Settings. enter T-LC. select the Single Phase Transformer. L-G Voltage. select 480/277 Wye. Click OK. 45 Click Add. select Distribution Systems. 49 On the Options Bar. under Electrical . 38 Click Modify. click . enter DP. for Distribution Sys. verify that Single is selected. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. select 480. 486 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 40 On the Options Bar. enter 480 Wye. Create a new distribution system 43 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. Next.■ Place a Single Phase Transformer . you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer. select 277. For Panel Name.480V Primary : 15kVA transformer on the wall between the panels. under Electrical . For Wires. for Panel Name.

The DP panel is logically connected to the transformer 54 Click Modify. 61 Close the Simple Room without saving. 59 On the Options Bar. click a new circuit. . Click . do the following: ■ ■ (Create Power Circuit) to create Click (Select a Panel for the Circuit).Surface : 100A (LC) panel. select the transformer. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 487 . 53 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar.240V MCB . This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer. Notice that 480 Wye is selected for Distribution Sys on the Options Bar. For Panel. select T-LC. click 60 On the Options Bar.Surface : 100A panel. enter LC. on the Options Bar. click to create a new circuit. under Electrical . 55 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . do the following: ■ For Distribution Sys. select DP. and click OK. This indicates that the transformer is associated with that distribution system.Loads. select 120/240 Single. for Panel Name. 58 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . ■ 57 In the Element Properties dialog. 56 On the Options Bar. 52 With the transformer selected. for Panel.240V MCB .51 In the drawing area.

(Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorCommercial .Modifying a Water Closet This exercise demonstrates adding piping connectors to a water closet family and setting typical connector properties for domestic cold water and sanitary systems. 3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented as shown. click the Training Files icon. 1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component. 488 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 5 On the Options Bar. click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element. you will be working at the back of the toilet. for System Type. Select the wall. click 2 On the View Control Bar. so you must hide the wall in the view. select Sanitary. and on the View Control Bar. click Pipe Connector. However.rfa. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that is selected.Wall Mount Flush Valve. 4 On the Design Bar. and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in the view. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Toilet .

The connector direction determines the direction from which it will accept connections from other components. so that the connector direction is The arrow indicates the connector direction. 8 Select the connector. 7 Click Modify. 10 Click . and click to add the connector. not the flow direction. highlight the round face. click pointing away from the bowl.6 Zoom in. and move the cursor over the larger of the 2 round extrusions at the back of the toilet as shown. Modifying a Water Closet | 489 . 9 If the arrow is pointing in toward the toilet bowl.

select Out. Clear Allow Slope Adjustments 490 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . specify values for the following parameters: For Radius. and click Modify. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. in the location shown. enter 4. For Flow Direction. select In. 13 Using the same method. . Select Allow Slope Adjustments For Fixture Units. 12 Click OK. enter 0' 1 1/2".11 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ to specify connector direction. 14 Select the connector. enter 0 3/4". add a Domestic Cold Water system Piping Connector. select Fixture Units. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Radius. click 15 On the Options Bar. For Flow Direction. For Flow Configuration.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Toilet . 18 Click File ➤ Save As. enter 2. click the Training Files icon.Ceiling Mech. 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family | 491 . select Fixture Units. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family In this exercise.Commercial Wall Mount Flush Valve. you modify a diffuser tag family to provide a type mark instead of the default instance mark. select a diffuser tag. and double-click 1 .■ ■ For Flow Configuration. 17 Click OK.rvt.5. and in the Save As dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. For Fixture Units.

(Remove parameter (Add parameter to label). and click 7 Click OK. and click from label). 6 Under Category Parameters. select Type Mark. click Edit Label. select Mark. and click Yes when asked to open the diffuser tag for editing. The Family Editor opens. 5 In the Edit Label dialog. under Label Parameters. 4 Select the top label (1i). Each label is associated with a parameter. The sample text changes to 1t. and on the Options Bar. The diffuser tag is composed of two labels separated by a horizontal line. click Edit Family. 492 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .3 On the Options Bar.

you modify a light fixture tag family to include panel and circuit information. R-1. select i Sample Project. The project becomes active and the diffuser tag updates to display the supply air terminal type. click Yes. S-1.rvt. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 493 . 11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. If more than one project is open. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. and click OK.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the return air diffuser type. in the Load into Projects dialog.8 On the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. 9 When prompted to overwrite the existing Diffuser Tag. click Load into Projects. without saving.

and after listening dimensions display. and double-click 1 . 6 On the Options Bar. select the 1i label. and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag for editing. 8 Move the cursor straight down. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. and press Enter to specify the copy end point. 7 Click the midpoint of the label to specify the copy start point. 494 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .Lighting. enter 0 1/8". select a light fixture tag.1 In the Project Browser. click Multiple. click (Copy). click Edit Family. The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter. 5 On the Edit toolbar. The Family Editor opens. 4 In the drawing area. 2 In the drawing area.

The label is copied. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 495 . 9 Repeat the previous steps to create a second copy of the label.

and click (Add parameter to label). and on the Options Bar. Next. click Edit Label. select Panel. The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor. 14 Under Category Parameters. and click parameter from label). The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter. (Remove 15 Under Label Parameters.10 Click Modify. 11 Select the bottom line of the box. 12 Select the middle label. select Type Mark. 496 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels. You need to modify this box. for the Panel parameter. 16 Click OK. Notice that the bounding box contains only the first label. under Label Parameters. 13 In the Edit Label dialog. you modify 2 labels. enter PNL in the Sample Value column.

17 Using the same method. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 497 . and click For the Circuit Number parameter. 19 If prompted. and click Yes. select Circuit Number. enter CKT in the Sample Value column The 3 light fixture labels are as shown. If more than one project is open. select Override parameter values of existing types.rvt. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are. Load the light fixture tag family into a project 18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. ■ ■ Under Category Parameters. select i Sample Project. click Load into Projects. and the light fixture tags update to display the panel and circuit information. modify the bottom label with the following Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Label Parameters. select Type Mark. and click (Remove parameter from label) (Add parameter to label). in the Load into Projects dialog.

without saving. The hosting of a component is defined by the template used when the family is originally created. such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. Creating a Light Fixture Family In this exercise you create an 8” ceiling hosted recessed downlight. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. or profile). There are various light fixture family templates available in Revit MEP. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. as they have reference 498 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . If you expect to render your lighting designs. you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. You cannot change these characteristics after you have created the family. model. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. it is important that you start your lighting family with one of these templates. the template also defines characteristics of how the family works. Creating Families In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families. In some cases. Templates also define the type of family (annotation. For example.20 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. 9 Save the newly-defined family. titleblock. The process of creating a component family includes the following steps: 1 Select the appropriate family template. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry.

When you use a spot light template. The . the family will have the additional parameters: Spot Beam Angle. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 499 . This can be shortened or lengthened as necessary to model the linear lighting fixture.rft. Lighting manufacturers often allow you to download .rft) and linear (Linear Lighting Fixture*.ies file. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and Light Source Elevation. Spot Tilt Angle. these planes are Light Source Axis (L/R). This file contains engineering data that can be used to calculate the coefficient of utilization of the fixture. 3 In the New dialog. Locate IES data file 1 Using Windows Explorer.rft). (This is the location from which the .ies file. and wall hosted objects. select Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. objects in the linked file. Using this face hosted family provides the ability for the fixture to be hosted by. there are lighting templates for non-hosted. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. Spot Spread Angle. select Lighting Fixtures.ies file is not used for rendering. ceiling hosted. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). select the Normal option Clear the Shared option NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. Create a new lighting family 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and double-click Front. and Light Source Elevation. For generic (Lighting Fixture*. you can also specify a . and click Open. 5 Under Family Category. 7 Click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. Each family has additional parameters depending on whether it is a linear fixture. such as Generic Model face based. Tilt Plane. and move with. Light Source Axis (L/R).ies files from the Web for their fixtures. When working in a linked file environment.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path.planes that define the location of the light source. you must determine the correct path to the IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. When creating a lighting family. 6 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the Always Vertical option Select Light Source For Part Type. you may use a non-lighting family template. Additionally. and copy the Ltl9815. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\IES folder.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). a spot fixture. these planes are Light Source Axis (F/B). navigate to the Imperial Templates folder.ies files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path.rft) lighting templates. For spot light templates (Spot Lighting Fixture*. Using the generic face hosted and non-hosted lighting fixtures has the limitation that the hosting geometry cannot be cut.rft. or a generic fixture. The Linear template contains a model line representing the light source along the F/B axis.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. Define the fixture geometry 12 On the Design Bar. 500 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . specify 0' 0". and click OK. enter 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. 15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation.rfa. . 4" above the Light Source reference plane. click Lines. for File name. 9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane. then draw a vertical line segment down to the ceiling (8"). and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown. Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane. 14 On the Options Bar. and drag it up to a point 4" above the Basic Ceiling and Ceiling Plane as shown. and Chain. 13 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. and finish with a 1" horizontal line segment to the left.0" and zoom in very close to create the Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve.TIP You may want set the scale to 6" = 1' . 11 In the Save As dialog. click . 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and draw a 4" horizontal line to the left of the center. and for Offset.

NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the short horizontal line at the base. enter 1/16". then click just above the line. offset by 1/16" to define the thickness of the light fixture housing. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 501 . click .Next you will duplicate the original outline. 17 On the Options Bar. press Tab to highlight the short line. 16 Click Lines. 18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1/16" above the existing line as shown. 19 Using the same method. move the cursor over the line. and for Offset. click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown.

click and . 21 On the Options Bar. 22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown. and for Offset. clear Chain.20 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 502 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 0' 0".

and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the dark line. click (Trim). 25 On the Design Bar.23 Click Modify. but make sure it is coincident with the vertical plane. and clean up the inside corner as shown. The length of the line and its exact location are not important. 26 Click Finish Sketch. 24 On the toolbar. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 503 . click Axis.

and click OK. for Light distribution. specify values for the following parameters: Under Electrical . click (Point). click (Photometric Web). for Emit from Shape. 29 In the Light Source Definition dialog. not grey) 504 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Light Source Definition. click Family Types. and on the Options Bar. 31 In the Family Types dialog. select the (yellow) Light Source. 30 On the Design Bar.Lighting ■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization. Define family and connector properties 28 In the drawing area.27 Save the family. select true (green check.

Under Electrical Loads ■ For Apparent Load. 35 On the Design Bar. expand View (All) ➤ 3D Views. enter 44. and is affected by the following fixture properties: ■ ■ ■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance) Initial Intensity (Type) Light Loss Factor (Type) 32 Click OK. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average Estimated Illumination.21 VA Under Electrical ■ For Lamp.85 for Value. enter 90 For Photometric Web File. ■ ■ A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space. click the Value column. and select Ltl9815. click file browser . and double-click View 1. For Initial Intensity. enter CF42TRT Under Photometrics ■ ■ For Tilt Angle. click Luminous Flux. and in the Light Loss Factor dialog. click the Value column. enter 3000 K and click OK. click Simple for Method. and on the Options Bar. or a static value may be entered. For Initial Color. and in the Initial Color dialog. select Power . and click OK.Balanced. click the Value column. 34 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model to view the top of the fixture. for Color Temperature. click Electrical Connector. click the Value column. and in the Initial Intensity dialog. enter 3200. enter 0. and verify that (Place on Face) is selected. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen output of the lighting fixtures in the room. and click OK. for Color Preset.ies in the ■ For Light Loss Factor. select <Custom>. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 505 . 33 In the Project Browser.

select the connector. 40 Save the family Cut a hole in the ceiling 41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. and click ■ ■ ■ . 44 On the Design Bar. enter 277 For Load Classification. . 45 On the Options Bar. and click OK. (Light at the intersection of planes is able to pass through the ceiling. 42 Spin the model to view the bottom of the ceiling. enter 0. and click to place the connector on the top of the fixture.Balanced is specified For Apparent Load. For Voltage.36 Highlight the face at the top of the fixture.) In the Project Browser. enter Lighting ■ ■ 39 Click OK. and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim (Temporary Hide/Isolate). select Apparent Load from the list. 38 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the View Control Bar. 43 Select the yellow Light Source. click in the column. it permits light to function as expected in renderings. verify that Power .95 For System Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. specify values for the following parameters: For Power Factor. click Opening. click ring as shown. 506 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents. click and select Hide Element. and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog. and double-click View 1. 37 Click Modify.

Revit MEP provides a Flange Family | 507 . select 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. 53 Click Window menu ➤ 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT.On the View Control Bar. Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external . The lighting level increases to 33 fc. 52 In the Project Browser.Ceiling Elec. click Load into Projects. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog.46 Click Finish Sketch.csv file. Flex the light fixture 49 Click File menu ➤ Open. 48 Save the family.rvt. The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project. and the wattage increases to 168. and double-click 1 . This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. click Hide/Isolate. click 47 On the View Control Bar. and use a Lookup Table to define several sizes for the flange. click the Training Files icon. The space tag indicates 22 fc and 135 W.rfa to make the family the active view. In this exercise. you learned: ■ ■ ■ (Temporary Hide/Isolate). The flange will be based on a 150 pound pressure class slip on flange. 51 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. 54 On the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. and in the Type Selector. and select Reset Temporary The basics of how lighting families work How to create a lighting family from a template Where to place IES files for use by lighting families Flange Family In this exercise. you will create a flange connector to model pipe flanges for model coordination. 55 Select the 4 downlights in the room.

select Pipe Fittings.csv file defines multiple sizes for this flange.rfa. select the Transition option.csv) file. For Part Type. (This is the location from which the LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and in the Save As dialog. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. 8 Using Windows Explorer. Select the Always Vertical option. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. click Add.csv file.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). select Generic Model. select Pipe Size For Group parameter under. 6 Click OK. See Lookup Tables on page 568 and CSV File Structure on page 569. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. select Piping For Type. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. and click OK. 4 Under Family Category. Revit MEP looks in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables to retrieve size information. verify that Family parameter is selected for Parameter Type and specify the following parameter data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 Click File ➤ Save. Clear the Shared option.text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (. When installed in the default path. select Dimensions Select Type 508 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter NR For Discipline. 10 Under Parameters. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.rft. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Create parameters 9 Click Family Types. 5 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear the Work Plane-Based option. The Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. and copy the Generic 150 psi Slip Flange.ini file. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. 2 In the New dialog.

ND) For D2. "D2". enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. click . and select 3” = 1'. enter 2" For Lookup Table Name = Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. R1. LenA1. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. select Pipe Size. 22 Click to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the right of the center line.csv Click Apply. "D1". and double-click Ref. select Dimensions. Level. D2. Flange Family | 509 . 0’. enter NR * 2 For R1. click Ref Plane. 0’. ND. R2 and specify the following parameters for each one: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. ND) For LenA1.0". 0’. select Piping.12 Click OK. 19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. ND) For LenA2. ND) 16 Click OK. 17 Save the family. 23 Click again to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the left of the center line as shown. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. Select the Instance option 14 In the Family Types dialog. create Instance parameters named D1. For Type. "LenA2". expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. enter D2 / 2 For LenA3. and for Offset. enter LenA2 – LenA1 For D1. 13 Using the same method. LenA2. select the Family parameter option For Discipline. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 21 On the Options Bar. For Group parameter under. Define work planes 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Design Bar. 0’. 15 Specify formulae for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND. LenA3. enter 0' 2". specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ For NR. "LenA1". enter D1 / 2 For R2.

click . 27 Using the same method. for Name. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane. 510 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Dimension.24 Click Modify 25 Select the left plane and. enter Connector for the Name of the right plane. and on the Options Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. enter Pipe. 29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane. 31 Click Modify. click (Aligned). under Identity Data.

click Model Lines. 46 Click Modify. 38 Click OK. 47 Select the 3 model lines. 39 Save the family. click Object Styles. and set the Projection Line weight of each category to 5.32 Select the dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and right plane (Connector) and click . and 44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes. The length is not important. . and label it LenA2. between the intersections with the right and left vertical planes as shown. but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes. click . under Other. click the Value column. and on the Options Bar. for Is Reference. 42 Click OK twice. and select 33 In the Element Properties. click Visibility. under Other. 48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Chain. click LenA1 from the list. 36 Click . and on the Options Bar. clear Fine. and click OK. 43 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Model Categories tab. Flange Family | 511 . click the Value column for Label. Define geometry 40 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and select Not a Reference. This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project. 34 Using the same method. 45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane. select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right) plane.

create dimensions for the right vertical line. and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension. under Other. click Dimension. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. 57 On the Design Bar. 56 Using the same method. from endpoint to endpoint. and on the Options Bar. click the Value column. we shut off the linework in Fine view. 54 Select the horizontal reference plane. press Tab to highlight the endpoint. and select Not a Reference. click . 58 Using the same method. 51 Click OK. 512 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . then select the other endpoint. click . 55 Click . 52 On the Design Bar. Thus. and click to place the dimension. 49 With all 3 lines still selected. click Dimension. move the cursor to the left. and on the Options Bar. for Reference. and in Fine view the solid model elements are shown. 53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line.NOTE Piping objects generally show as linework in Coarse and Medium view. click . create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line.

click the Value column. and select D2.59 Click Modify. . 64 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations (Elevation 1). under Other. select the dimension for the right line and label it D1. 67 Click Lines. Create the first extrusion 63 In the Project Browser. Flange Family | 513 . and on the Options Bar. 66 In the Work Plane dialog. click 72 Select the dimension line. click Radius. and double-click Left. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. specify Reference Plane : Pipe. for Label. and click . and click OK. click . click Set Work Plane. and enter 0' 5". 60 Select the dimension for the overall length of the left line. for Label. 62 Using the same method. 69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. click the Value column. 71 Select the circle. 70 Click Modify. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 On the Options Bar. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. and select R2. 65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. click and . under Other. and in the drawing area.

75 Click Extrusion Properties. 514 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK twice. and enter 0' 10". 79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click and . click 89 Select the dimension line. clear Coarse and Medium. 87 Click Modify. 90 In the Element Properties. and click 91 Click OK. under Other. click Set Work Plane.74 Click OK. 84 Click Lines. for Extrusion End. 83 In the Work Plane dialog. for Visibility/Graphics. . 88 Select the circle. and select R1. and click OK. 76 In the Element Properties dialog. in the 86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. under Constraints. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 82 On the Sketch Editor tab on the Design Bar. 85 On the Options Bar. select LenA2. specify Reference Plane : Center (Left/Right). click Edit. and in the drawing area. 80 Click Finish Sketch. click the Value column. 77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. . 78 Under Graphics. Create the second extrusion 81 On the Design Bar. click column. click Radius. and click OK. for Label.

100 Click the scale on the View Control Bar.92 Click Extrusion Properties. and select 6” = 1'. select LenA1. Flange Family | 515 . 94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 98 Save the family. 105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange. expand 3D Views. 93 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that is selected. 103 On the Design Bar. and for System Type. clear Coarse and Medium. 104 On the Options Bar. (Model Graphics Style). under Constraints. for Visibility. and double-click View 1. where the 2 extrusions meet. 97 Click Finish Sketch. click Edit. for Extrusion End. and select Wireframe to view both in the 102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown. 101 On the View Control Bar. click extrusions.0". Add connectors 99 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. select Fitting. 96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK. click column. click Pipe Connector. 95 Under Graphics.

110 In the Element Properties dialog. 107 Click Modify. to change the direction of flow.106 Click to add the connector. under Dimensions. enter 5". 516 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . if necessary. click and. 108 Select the connector. click . 109 With the connector selected. and click OK. for Radius. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face.

add a connector to the larger extrusion.111 Spin the flange to view the back of the larger extrusion. Flange Family | 517 . and using the same method. 112 Click Pipe Connector.

select NR. 116 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 117 Select both connectors. First. 114 Select the connector. you create the physical fitting geometry by using reference planes and lines. under Dimensions. if necessary.113 Click Modify. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. and by defining fitting size parameters. 518 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click 119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 120 Save the family Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family In this exercise. in the column. you can use the same method to create a duct fitting family for air systems. to change the direction of flow. and click the second connector. test the fitting geometry. and set the object visibility. You then create single line geometry for the elbow. click . you create an elbow pipe fitting family. 115 Select the first connector. 118 In the Element Properties dialog. for Radius. and click OK twice. click and. After completing the pipe fitting family. click Link Connector on the Options Bar.

Level floor plan window. navigate to a folder of your choice. Configure the elbow pipe fitting family 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. under Family Category. 9 In the Project Browser. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Select Generic Model. 14 Select the 2 reference planes. Verify that Always vertical is selected. select Pipe Fittings: 5 Under Family Parameters. one window for each open project remains open. Level to make it the active view. 10 Maximize the Ref. and verify that both reference planes have been pinned. A new family file is created and new views open.NOTE Fittings are among the most complex families to create. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. click the current scale value. Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project.rft. 13 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Even if you have created parametric families before. and select 6" = 1'-0". 7 Click File ➤ Save. Click Open. It is recommended that you methodically follow the steps and periodically check your work against the exercise. You can also press CTRL+S. However. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. 6 Click OK. Verify that Shared is cleared. They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model. on the Edit toolbar. Define reference planes Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family Editor. if you have other projects open during a session. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 519 . 2 In the New dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Work Plane-Based is cleared. It may take a longer to complete this exercise as compared to other exercises in this tutorial. and save the family as Threaded Generic Elbow. For Part Type. If necessary. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and double-click Ref. click . 8 In the Save As dialog. select Elbow. creating system families typically takes more time to complete. verify that Imperial Templates is selected.

under Identity Data. click . 15 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. A tooltip and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name. and in the Element Properties dialog. 23 Add new reference plane 2" above the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. enter 0' 1".Pinning prevents accidentally moving the reference planes. 22 Select the horizontal Center (Front/Back) reference plane. for Name. 18 Click Modify. TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object. 16 On the Options Bar. 21 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. click . enter Fitting. for Name. 520 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter Coupling. and click OK. 19 Select the left plane. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Click to the left the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane to place a new reference line to the left of the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane. add another vertical plane 2" to the left of the left (Fitting) plane. and for Offset.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. for Name. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. 29 On the Options Bar. 25 Right-click the new reference plane. They are not displayed when the family is used in a project. You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry. and click Element Properties. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Reference Lines. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 521 . (Line) is selected. enter Radius. Create reference lines and dimension them Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family. Verify that Radius is cleared. verify that 0' 0" is specified.24 Click Modify. For Offset.

and click the right end of the reference line to align the right end of the reference line to the Fitting reference plane. 37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane.30 In the drawing area. Next. align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical reference plane (Coupling). you draw an arced reference line. 36 Using the same method. 522 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click (Align). 34 Using the same method. 38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 31 On the Edit toolbar. 35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane as shown. draw a horizontal line of the approximate length and location as shown. 32 Select the middle vertical reference plane (Fitting).

and press Enter to specify a 45 degree radius for the arc. 43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc. Verify that Radius is cleared. ■ You may need to click ■ ■ For Offset. 44 Click Modify.39 On the Design Bar. and. 45 Select the arc reference line. click Reference Lines. and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ). click the right end of the left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc. 42 Move the cursor directly down. select this sketching option from the list. enter 45. 40 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to specify the center of the arc. and after the endpoint snap displays. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 523 . (Arc from center and endpoints). 41 In the drawing area. verify that 0' 0" is specified.

The dimension control located near the reference plane represents the projected length of that line relative to the reference plane. 50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point. Next. you draw a diagonal reference line. 47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line. and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown. Verify that Radius is cleared. The dimension control that is located perpendicular to the line being dimensioned represents the overall length of that line. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 524 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 48 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. click Reference Lines.NOTE Temporary dimensions have two dimension controls that allow you to convert the temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. By default. and adjust the length of the witness lines as shown. For Offset. dimensions are temporary—they only display when selected. 51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference plane. (Line) is selected. 46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of the arc).

52 Click Modify.While drawing the diagonal reference line. convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal reference line to a permanent dimension. 61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown. 57 In the Type Selector. 54 Using the same method. click (Angular). click Dimension. 59 Add the following aligned dimensions: Between the Radius and the Center (Front/Back) horizontal reference planes. 55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected. and add an angular dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which is located below the diagonal reference line). and clean up the witness lines as necessary. the Tangent Extension tooltip may display to indicate that the diagonal reference line is tangent to the arced reference line. on the Options Bar. verify that ■ ■ ■ (Aligned) is selected. 53 Select the diagonal reference line. 60 With the Dimension tool active. 56 On the Design Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 525 . 58 On the Options Bar. zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls. Between the Coupling and the Fitting vertical reference planes. Between the Fitting and the Center vertical reference planes.

For Group parameter under. create the following family parameters: Name Discipline Type of Parameter Group parameter under Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Angle Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Instance/Type Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance LenA2 BdyRad CplRad NomDia NomRad Ang Piping Piping Piping Piping Piping Common 526 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 68 Using the same method. is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog. The new family parameter. For Discipline. select Pipe Size. under Parameters. enter LenA1. 65 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 67 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.62 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. select Piping. LenA1. 66 Under Parameter Data. For Type of Parameter. Create family parameters and assign them to dimensions 63 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 64 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameter Type. select Dimensions. click Add. Select Instance to create an Instance Parameter. verify that Family parameter is selected.

The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter. 72 On the Options Bar. in the Formula column.25". in the Value column. specify that following values and formulae: ■ ■ ■ ■ For CplRad. NOTE When specifying formulae. in the Formula column. For LenA2. Lookup tables are not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by various project-specific factors. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. 74 Press CTRL+S. 70 Click OK. 73 Using the same method. and copy the Threaded Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 527 . the calculated length defines the geometry. you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. NOTE Associate each dimension separately. 71 In the drawing area. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter as this will cause errors.Next. enter LenA1 * tan(Ang / 2). 69 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1. select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back) and Radius reference planes. in the Value column. enter NomRad * 2. NomDia. 75 Using Windows Explorer. Revit MEP uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter. for Label. enter 2". For NomRad. select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown. Use a lookup table file to define multiple sizes A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information. Fittings must have their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right) and Center (Front/Back) reference planes. select the LenA1 family parameter.

If you encounter this type of issue. Next. NomDia). click Family Types. 0. This is the default path. Next. RELATED During fitting creation. This sweep uses the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry.rft. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. "LenA1". Revit MEP may not be able to read it and any family type parameter formulae that refer to that lookup table will most likely return a value of 0 and errors will occur. in the Value column. 0. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. NomDia). However. 82 In the New dialog. copy the lookup table data from the problematic lookup table file and paste it into a new text file. 83 In the Project Browser.csv lookup table file. for Lookup Table Name. 78 In the Formula column. The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted. Level floor plan is the active view.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). select Profile. 528 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . verify that the Ref. 0. 76 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. you begin creating the fitting geometry. Create a fitting profile You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion. you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size.csv and click Apply. you can add them according to manufacturers’ specifications. 80 Press CTRL+S to save the family. For CplRad. if specific pipe sizes that you need are not present in the lookup table file by default. enter the following formulae: ■ ■ ■ For LenA1. and click Open. 79 Click OK. you must save the lookup table file in a plain text format. "CplRad". If the file is saved in a proprietary format. 77 In the Family Types dialog. For BdyRad. 81 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter Threaded Generic Elbow. "BdyRad".csv file extension and copy it to the LookupTables folder. NomDia).Generic Elbow. Save the text file with the file name including the .

97 On the View Control Bar. 94 Using the same method. click the current scale. verify that Profiles is selected. 93 Click to lock the circle to the horizontally.84 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. For Offset. and on the Options Bar. zoom out. enter 1". 90 In the Element Properties dialog. and select 6" = 1'. 86 On the Options Bar. click . ). ■ (Circle). and click the dimension control ( The temporary dimension converts to a permanent dimension.0". verify that 0' 0" is specified. 89 Select the circle. 87 In the drawing area. 85 In the Type Selector. 88 Click Modify. and click OK. click Lines. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. select Center Mark Visible. 96 Click the dimension value. align and lock the circle vertically. 91 On the Edit toolbar. and then click the circle center mark to align the circle horizontally. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 529 . Verify that Radius is cleared. You may need to click ■ ■ and select this sketching option from the list. click (Align). and press ENTER. 92 Click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. The center mark displays allowing you to align the circle to the reference planes. 95 Select the circle. 98 Zoom in to view the sketch. under Graphics. draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown.

For Discipline. under Parameter Data. under Family Types. create a family type named Coupling. click Add. select Dimensions. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Fitting. click Family Types.99 On the Design Bar. 107 On the Options Bar. enter Rad. Verify that the Type option is selected to create a Type parameter. click New. 106 In the drawing area. and click OK. 102 In the Family Types dialog. Next. Click OK. 100 In the Family Types dialog. For Group parameter under. 101 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click OK. under Parameters. you create a new family type. select the dimension. 530 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. The new family type is listed in the Name list. 105 In the Family Types dialog. select Rad. 103 Name the new family type. select Piping. for Label. For Type of Parameter. The new family parameter is listed under Dimensions. 104 Using the same method. select Pipe Size. The dimension is now associated to and controlled by the Rad family parameter.

under Existing family parameters of compatible type. you create the fitting geometry. and save the family as Threaded Pipe Profile. right click Coupling. TIP Remember that when you use cross-picking (drag right to left) to select an object. the cross-picking border only needs to intersect an object in order to select it. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Threaded Pipe Profile. and click OK. 114 For Type.108 Click File ➤ Save. 116 In the Associate Family Parameter. select Fitting. click . under Existing family parameters of compatible type. 112 In the Associate Family Parameter. and click OK twice. Next. an object must be fully contained when using a pick box (drag left to right). Associate family parameters to a profile parameter You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the radius of the elbow fitting geometry. under Dimensions. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 531 . 110 In the Project Browser. You create sweeps using the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry. The object does not need to be fully contained within the border. click Load into Projects to load the Threaded Pipe Profile into the Threaded – Generic Elbow family. select CplRad. for Rad. click Apply. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. 109 On the Design Bar. Notice that the Threaded . and click Properties. 118 In the drawing area. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur. you load the fitting profile into the project. select BdyRad.Generic Elbow project becomes active. Next. Create sweeps using reference lines The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. click . 111 In the Type Properties dialog. 117 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. 115 Under Dimensions.rfa. In contrast. Each sweep is based on the profile that you created and loaded into the project. for Rad. 113 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. click Finish Path. 532 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 124 In the drawing area. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list. 123 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click the red dot on the horizontal reference line. clear Reference Lines and Reference Planes. and Angle options are specified at 0. Only the reference lines and reference planes display. click Finish Sweep. click Pick Path. Y. 127 On the Options Bar. 120 In the Filter dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. click (Filter Selection). and click OK.119 On the Options Bar. select the left horizontal reference line. 126 In the drawing area. 125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. 122 On the Design Bar. Verify that the X. 121 On the View Control Bar. 128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

click Finish Path. click the red dot on the arced reference line. and Angle options are specified at 0. 133 In the drawing area. click Pick Path. 135 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list. you create the geometry for the fitting body. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.The geometry for the left coupling is created. Next. Verify that the X. click Finish Sweep. 134 On the Options Bar. select the arced reference line. 132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 533 . 131 In the drawing area. 129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Y.

The geometry for the fitting body is created. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. clear all annotation categories. add a solid sweep. 136 Using the same method. The elbow fitting geometry is created. 534 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. Next. The fitting geometry displays. enter VG. and click OK. you verify the fitting geometry. Next. 138 With the 3D view active. you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting. and select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling. 137 In the Project Browser.

(Filter Selection). 143 In the drawing area. 145 In the Filter dialog. and verify the fitting geometry. double-click Floor Plans ➤ Ref.140 While pressing SHIFT and the middle mouse button. This fitting geometry displays when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used. In this section. 142 Press CTRL+S to save the family. In Revit MEP. 146 On the View Control Bar. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. you need to hide some of the geometry in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display. Create detail level geometry Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level. you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 535 . Coarse and Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. select Other. First. and click OK. Level to make it the active view. click The 3 sweeps are selected. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 141 In the Project Browser. click Check None. drag the cursor to spin the model. The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe fittings as double line. 144 On the Options Bar.

Select (Pick Lines). 536 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . verify that Level : Ref Level is selected.Only the reference planes and reference lines display. do the following: ■ For Plane. 147 On the Design Bar. 150 In the drawing area. click Model Lines. 148 In the Type Selector. select the left horizontal reference line. 149 On the Options Bar. Verify that Lock is cleared. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. ■ ■ ■ For Offset.

and on the Options Bar. you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from top to bottom). and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right. This converts the overall angle temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. This associates the angle dimension of the arced model line to the Ang family parameter. 157 Select the permanent dimension. TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object and press Tab. for Label. select the arced reference line to create an arced model line. click to lock the model line to the reference line. and lock the model line to the arced reference line. Each time you press Tab. 154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension. 151 With the model line selected. 156 Click Modify. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 537 . 153 Click Modify. 152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method. select Ang.A model line is created over the reference line. A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object. 155 Zoom out.

538 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click the diagonal model line. you dimension the diagonal model line. verify that Angular Dimension Style : Linear angular style is selected. 167 Click Modify. 164 On the Options Bar. click (Angular). then click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. associate the new angular dimension to the Ang family parameter. convert the diagonal model line overall length temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. If you lock it. 169 Relocate the dimension annotations. 163 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 168 Using the same method. NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line. and modify the witness lines as shown. If necessary. and associate it to the LenA1 family parameter. 165 In the Type Selector. 159 Using the same method. Revit MEP warns you that locking the alignment would over constrain the sketch. 166 In the drawing area. press Tab to locate the model line.158 Relocate the dimension annotation. 160 Click Modify. 162 Using the same method. and finally move the cursor and click to place the dimension. create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line (located at the right end of the arced model line). NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line. and modify the witness lines as shown. Next. click Dimension. 161 Select the diagonal model line.

under Dimensions. 171 Press CTRL+S. The part flexes to become a 90 degree elbow fitting. enter 90. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 539 . for Ang.170 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Next. and click Apply. Flex the part 172 On the Design Bar. you flex the part to validate the design. 173 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Check all constraints and verify that model lines were created and properly constrained. 175 In the drawing area. 176 On the Options Bar. 174 Restore the Ang parameter to 45. and click OK. this is usually caused by a constraint issue. clear Lines (Pipe Fitting) and Reference Planes. click (Filter Selection).NOTE If the part does not flex and errors occur. 177 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 178 On the View Control Bar. Add tick marks and dimension them You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or Medium (single line) detail level. Lines (Pipe Fittings) are the model lines. 540 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . you create tick marks. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view. Everything except for model lines and reference planes are selected. Next.

TIP You draw this model line on top of the Coupling reference plane. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the horizontal model line as shown. draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the diagonal model line as shown. Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. do the following: ■ For Plane. Verify that Radius is cleared. 182 At the left end of the fitting. Line length is approximate. 179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. 181 On the Options Bar. 183 At the right end of the fitting. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 541 .Only model lines and reference planes display. click Model Lines. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. 180 In the Type Selector.

then move the cursor to the left and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. The 2 tick marks are drawn. 187 On the left end of the fitting. verify that (Aligned) is selected. dimension the bottom half of the left model line. The top half of the model line (tick mark) is dimensioned. and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark). NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line. 184 On the Design Bar.Again. 185 In the Type Selector. click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane and click the top end point of the model line (tick mark). 542 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 186 On the Options Bar. length is approximate. 189 Using the same method. dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking the diagonal model line first. 188 Using the same method. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Linear is selected. Next. you dimension each side of the 2 tick marks.

195 Click the diagonal model line and then click the right model line tick mark. 194 On the Options Bar. Next.You place 2 dimensions for the right model line. associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 543 . you create an angular dimension between the diagonal model line and the right model line tick mark. 193 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 198 Relocate the dimension annotations. 197 Select the angular dimension. click (Angular). 196 Click Modify. 192 Using the same method. and lock it to 90 degrees. select CplRad This associates that dimension to the CplRad family parameter. and on the Options Bar. You cannot select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter. 191 Select the lower dimension for the left model line. click Dimension. You may need to zoom out to locate the lock. for Label. 190 Click Modify. move the cursor down and click to place the dimension. NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. and modify the witness lines as shown. The dimension are as shown.

Flex the part 201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.199 On the View Control Bar. 544 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and for NomRad enter 1 1/2". The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 3 inch diameter. and click Apply. enter 90. click Family Types.Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ . for Ang. 202 In the Family Types dialog. 200 Press CTRL+S to save the family.

NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting. 208 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. verify that Coarse and Medium are selected. Only model lines are selected. 204 In the drawing area. the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe diameter that is not included in the lookup table file.csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on the manufacturers’ specifications. click Visibility. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 545 . you set object visibility. 206 In the Filter dialog. 205 On the Options Bar. Next. Specify object visibility You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail level setting. you specify the 2-line geometry for the Fine detail level setting. clear Fine. You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate it. select Lines (Pipe Fittings). This specifies that the single-line fitting geometry will display when only the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are selected. click Check None. and click OK. and click OK.203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values. 207 With the model lines selected. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. You may want to refer to the Threaded Generic Elbow. Next. you specify this single line geometry to a detail level setting. click (Filter Selection). on the Options Bar. Next.

221 On the Design Bar. select Other. click to place the primary connector. click (Filter Selection). (Place on 223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting. on the Options Bar. 218 In the Filter dialog. 546 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .209 In the drawing area. click Pipe Connector. select Fitting from the system type list. Next. and verify that Face) is selected. 216 In the drawing area. 213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. You begin by placing the primary connector. and click OK. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and after the edge highlights. and click OK. 212 With the sweeps selected. Add connectors 215 In the Project Browser. Only the 3 sweeps are selected. 220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting. click None. The fitting displays. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. clear Coarse and Medium. 219 On the View Control Bar. 214 Press CTRL+S. click (Filter Selection). The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected. 217 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you add connectors to the elbow fitting family. click None. select Dimensions. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view. verify that Fine is selected. 210 On the Options Bar. click Visibility. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. 222 On the Options Bar. 211 In the Filter dialog.

place a connector on the left face of the fitting. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 547 . the primary connector must be placed on the face that is on the X-axis. Unexpected behavior can result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors. Notice that crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector.The primary connector is placed. You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis. and that if all connectors are not properly rotated and linked. 224 Using the same method. You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view. NOTE When you place fitting connectors.

The 2 selected connectors display in red. click Link Connector. ■ The connector radii change. Next. select NomRad. select ■ . enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.225 Click Modify. Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally. Notice that values are assigned to both associated parameters. 230 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. select the 2 connectors. you specify connector properties. click OK. Next. 227 On the Options Bar. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. ■ ■ For Radius. Rotate connectors 231 In the 3D view. For Angle. It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. The 2 connectors are linked. Next. you rotate the connectors. select Ang. and click the other connector. This allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. 548 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 226 Select the primary connector (indicated by crosshairs). it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they are oriented vertically. and click OK. and that these parameters cannot be edited in the Element Properties dialog. click . verify that Fitting is selected. Although the connectors are round. 228 In the drawing area. The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. click . you link both connectors. do the following: For System Type. 229 On the Options Bar.

If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly. and click to specify the rotation end point. creating an unexpected result. click (Rotate). 235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees. 233 Select the connector. click to specify the rotation start point. it is extremely important for rectangular connectors such as those on rectangular duct fittings. and after the intersection snap displays. Although this is not as important for round connectors. the rectangular connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes. the rectangular duct fitting will be inserted improperly. where the part geometry is clearly visible. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 549 . The connector orientation determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. and on the Options Bar. Remember that for rectangular connectors.IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement. You may find it easier to rotate connectors in a 3D view. 234 Move the cursor over the model line and to the left of the connector arrow. The height is not on these axes. 232 Spin the fitting to view the entire primary connector.

NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane. You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section. 237 Press CTRL+S to save the family. rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation. Next. you verify the connector arrow direction. 550 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . This also flips the connector arrow. 236 Using the same method. The primary connector is rotated and now has a vertical orientation.

In most instances. Test the elbow fitting in a project 240 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. This template may not be the Systems-Default template.Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.rfa . a connector arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated. select the project that you just created from the Load into Projects dialog. the duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it. 242 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded Generic Elbow. You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows. NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar. Next.Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Template file. verify that Project is selected. If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default. IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being created to complete a connection. opens. 239 Press CTRL+S.rte template. The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active. and click OK. click Load into Projects. 244 In the Project Browser. This is the default view when a project. verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its connector as shown. It does not indicate flow direction. Because Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 551 . 241 In the New Project dialog. then click Browse. verify that the path points to the Systems-Default. based on the systems default template. Otherwise.Verify connector arrow direction 238 In the 3D view. a new project is created based on the current project template. The 1 . Click OK. and locate this template file.3D View to switch back to the threaded coupling family. TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options). Under Create New. The Systems-Default template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project. you load the threaded elbow family into the new project. verify that the 1 .rte template file. 243 On the Design Bar. If more than one project is open.

it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech view. 245 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type. 246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. 247 On the Options Bar, click .

248 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 249 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Elbow, select Threaded – Generic Elbow: Threaded – Generic Elbow, and click OK twice. 250 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter) select 3”. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that the Offset elevation is specified at 9' 0"

251 In the drawing area, draw some piping, using various angles and offset elevations. NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file. 252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.

You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed properly. Next, you check connectivity. Check connectivity 253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity. The piping highlights indicating that it is connected. 254 Click Modify. Hide shape handles 255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view. 256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.

552 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow. Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.

258 Drag the upper triangular shape handle upward as shown.

Notice that this shape handle modified the fitting geometry.

Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 553

IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected. This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings, duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference lines and all reference planes that are used for that family. 259 Press CTRL+Z to undo the modification. 260 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded - Generic Elbow.rfa - Floor Plan: Ref. Level to switch to the elbow family floor plan view. 261 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing, including reference planes.

262 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

263 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Reference Planes, and click OK. Only the reference planes are selected. 264 On the Options Bar, click .

265 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK. 266 Using the same method, specify Not a Reference for all reference lines. 267 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 268 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select the test project in which you tested the elbow fitting, and click OK. 269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. The test project becomes active. 270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout. Notice that all shape handles are hidden.

554 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The threaded elbow is ready to be used in a project. RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting, proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and drawn.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family
It is likely that you will need to create annotation symbols that are not part of a building model. For example, a common symbol in MEP drawings is a New to Existing Connection callout. In this exercise, you create such an annotation. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the New dialog, select Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open. 3 Maximize the window, and in the drawing area, zoom in to view the note (located near the intersection of the reference planes). This note contains key points to remember when creating an annotation family. 4 Select the note and delete it. 5 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the intersection of the 2 reference planes. Draw lines 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Clear Chain.

(Draw), and

(Line) are selected.

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 0 1/8, and press Enter. This creates a 1/8" line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line. 10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 1/8" lines located above, below, and to the left of the intersection as shown.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 555

TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes. 12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. This hides the reference planes allowing you to better view the lines.

Next, you create the filled regions. Create filled regions

13 On the toolbar, click

(Fine Lines).

14 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design, verify that Lines is selected. 16 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 17 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Select

(Draw) is selected.

(Arc from center and endpoints). and, select this sketching option from the list.

You may need to click

Click Radius, and enter 3/32".

18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.

556 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.

20 Move the cursor over the right horizontal line, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the end point of the arc.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 557

An arced line is drawn.

21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Click

(Draw) and Chain are selected.

(Line).

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

22 In the drawing area, click the upper end point of the arced line, then click the intersection of the 4 lines, and finally click the lower end point of the arced line.

558 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

A chain of 2 lines is drawn. 23 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. This filled region is created.

24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.

Next, you draw a circle around the 2 filled regions. 25 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Click

(Draw) is selected.

(Circle).

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 559

■ ■

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Click Radius, and verify that 0' 3/32" is specified.

27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle. 28 Click Modify.

29 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as New to Existing.rfa Test the annotation symbol in a project 30 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 32 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rvt. 33 Click Window menu ➤ New to Existing.rfa - Drawing Sheet to switch to the new annotation symbol family. 34 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 35 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 36 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Symbol. 37 In the Type Selector, verify that New to Existing is selected. 38 On the Options Bar, click .

39 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 40 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 42 In the drawing area, zoom in, and click to place the annotation symbol in the project. 43 Press ESC twice. Next, you modify the symbol leader. 44 Select the leader to display shape handles.

560 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.

46 Drag the end shape handle to modify the annotation symbol as shown.

47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol. 48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts
A defining feature of Revit MEP content is the concept of connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP content to participate in specific systems and facilitate calculations for a variety of parameters.

Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.

Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and others.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts | 561

Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.

Connector Properties
The discipline assigned to a connector determines the connector’s properties. The following tables show the different connector parameters, by property group, for each discipline and a brief description of their functionality.
Electrical Constraints Edge loop centered Graphics Size on screen Electrical - Loads True Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 3) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 2) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 1) x (Power Factor). Percentage of power attributed to this connector. Active only when Power is specified as System Type. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >2. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >1. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor. Connector placement method (read only).

True Load Phase 2

True Load Phase 1

Power Factor

Apparent Load Phase 3

Apparent Load Phase 2

562 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Apparent Load Phase 1

Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current). Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power. The voltage specified on the connector. Active only when the System Type is Power. Possible values are: Data, Power - Balanced, Power - Unbalanced, Telephone, Security, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, Communication. Possible values are: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. Possible values are: Lagging, Leading. Possible values are: 1, 2, or 3.

Apparent Load

Voltage

System Type

Load Classification Power Factor State Number of Poles Identity Data Index Primary Connector

A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. A description of the connector

Connector Description

Mechanical (HVAC) Constraints Edge loop centered Angle Connector placement method (read only) Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Flow Factor Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

Connectors | 563

Loss Coefficient Flow Configuration Flow Direction System Type

Active only when the Loss Method is Coefficient. Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Undefined. Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.

Loss Method Mechanical - Airflow Pressure Drop Flow Dimensions Shape Height

Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss. The amount of air flowing at this connector.

Possible values are: Rectangular or Round. The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The radius of the connector when the Shape is defined to be round.

Width

Radius

Identity Data Index Primary Connector A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only) A description of the connector

Link Connector Index Connector Description

Mechanical (Piping) Constraints Edge loop centered Connector placement method (read only).

564 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Angle

Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration is Fixture Units. K Coefficient (K Factor) is only editable if Loss Method is specified as “K Coefficient”. Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector. Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated. Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K Coefficient, Specific Loss. Possible values are: Checked or unchecked. Possible values are: Undefined, Hydronic Supply, Hydronic Return, Sanitary, Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot Water, Fire Protection, Other. Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Projecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

K Coefficient

Flow Factor

Flow Pressure Drop Flow Configuration Flow Direction

Loss Method

Allow Slope Adjustments System Type

K Coefficient Table

Dimensions Radius Identity Data Index A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). The nominal size of the connector.

Connectors | 565

Primary Connector

Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only). A description of the connector.

Link Connector Index Connector Description

System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.

Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.

Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).

Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems. When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply, Return, Other.

When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).

When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).

566 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Load Classifications
Revit MEP maintains information about loads associated with the rooms in a project. As devices and equipment are placed in rooms, Revit MEP keeps track of the loads based on load type: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. The loads associated with the room can be view in the Element Properties for each room, and displayed in schedules.

Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:

Place on Face This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier to use, and is suitable for most cases. Place on Work Plane This option allows placement of the connector on a selected plane. For many cases it would be possible to imitate the place on face option by specifying a plane and using dimensions to constrain the connector to the desired location. However, this method generally requires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively.

Connectors | 567

NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front / Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.

Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside. When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or otherwise. When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.

Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family, titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You must start the family with the appropriate template.

Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv) file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file. The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue) Where: Is:

568 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

result LookupTableName LookupColumn

the returned value. the name of the CSV file to lookup. the name of the column from which the result value is to be returned. the value that will be returned if LookupValue is not found. the value to find in the first column of the table.

DefaultIfNotFound LookupValue

CSV File Structure
The first row of values in the CSV file is for header information, to describe the contents of subsequent columns. The headers are of the format ParameterName##ParameterType##ParameterUnits Acceptable parameter types are: NUMBER, LENGTH, AREA, VOLUME, ANGLE, and OTHER For example, a column may have the following header: TotalArea##AREA##INCHES to represent the total area in square inches. The first column in the file contains a description. The Lookup Function processes the information in the file starting with column 2.

Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped (associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking (small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited. The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the parameters to which they have been mapped.

Parameter Mapping | 569

Category
Revit MEP components fall into general categories (pipe fittings, lighting fixtures, and so on). The Family Category specified when a family is created determines which Family Parameters are activated. The settings for these family parameters affect the behavior for the part and identifies the type of component. In Family Editor, the Family Category and Parameters settings are found in the Settings menu. Depending on the Family Category and the type of template that the family was derived from (host-based, generic model, detail component, generic tag, and so on), different Family Parameters apply. The following table lists each Family Category, and indicates the applicable Family Parameters. Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver- Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation Shared

Air Terminals Communications Devices Data Devices Duct Accessories Duct Fittings Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Fire Alarm Devices Generic Models Lighting Devices Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Nurse Call Devices Pipe Accessories Pipe Fittings Plumbing Fixtures Security Devices

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

570 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

each lighting fixture family has one light source. Part Types The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family category.Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver. and the light distribution (spherical. Valve Light Source | 571 . Duct Fittings. Duct Accessories. and determines the behavior for the parts in the family. The part type serves 2 functions: ■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. you can adjust the position and brightness of each light source to achieve the desired lighting effects. Pipe Accessories. So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP. Exit. Elbow. Equipment. or photometric web). Obstruction. as is the case with receptacles and switches. Light Source A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP. To determine the part type family. Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family. for fittings it would not be valid to replace a cross with a transition. rectangle. Initial Intensity. Plumbing Fixture Part Types Damper.Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation X X X Shared Sprinklers Telephone Devices X X X X X X Family Parameters ■ ■ ■ Light Source: See Light Source on page 571. This allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. circle). create a nested family. the part type must be defined. You can also define photometric characteristics. Fan and System Interaction. hemispherical. Undefined. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the database. However. In a project. When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Entry. Hood. Duct Mounted Equipment. To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a chandelier or a set of track lights). the Part Type values available depends on the family category. Part Type: See Part Types on page 571. The following table shows which part types apply to which family categories: Family Categories Air Terminals. there are times when this is not appropriate. ■ If a family category provides a Part Type parameter. such as Light Loss Factor. and Initial Color Control. Pipe Fittings. Junction. Generally the Type Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category. Transition. you can specify the shape of the light element (point. For example. spot. In general. Mechanical Equipment. line.

Security. Switch Junction Box ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Damper: Used to control flow volume. the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch.Family Categories Communication Devices. Telephone. the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box. Controls. steam generators Elbow: A bend or elbow type fitting Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers. Fire Alarm Devices. Lighting Devices. Nurse Call. lab or other exhaust hoods Junction: Intersection of 3 or more segments (tee. Security Devices. Electrical Fixtures. Data Panel. Lighting Fixtures. cross. Panelboard. Nurse Call Devices. Data Devices. and light fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 572 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . such as an inline filter Transition: Shape or size change Undefined: No specific functionality Valve: Valves and similar accessories Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data. Electrical Equipment. and Communication. inline fans Hood: Kitchen. Switchboard. As indicated in the image. Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device. fire alarm components. Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. Fire Alarm. grills. As indicated in the image. Duct Mounted Equipment: Smoke detectors. wye) Obstruction: Anything that causes a pressure drop. Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. Transformer. grates Exit: Point at which fluid leaves the system Equipment: Generic equipment Fan and System Interaction AHUs. Telephone Devices Part Types Normal. Normal: Devices such as receptacles.

■ Part Types | 573 .■ Switchboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. Transformer: Used to interconnect Panelboards and/or Switchboards of differing voltages.

574 .

As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. exterior fire stairs. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and a roof garden. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2009. slight modifications to the building design have been made. balconies. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. 575 . Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. NOTE For training purposes. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. lofty ceilings.

576 .

including plan. how to create section and elevation views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. 577 . you learn how to create views from a building model. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 10 In this tutorial. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views. section. elevation.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 578 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.

expand Floor Plans. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 579 . under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.

right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Vicinity Plan. under Floor Plans. 580 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 12 In the Rename View dialog.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 Under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan.

and click 1''= 80'-0''.14 On the View Control Bar. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. click the current scale. Next. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Duplicating Plan Views | 581 .

582 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 583 . 3 In the Type Selector. select Elevation: Building Elevation. select 1/8''=1'-0''.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. for Scale. under Floor Plans. click Elevation. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. 584 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

11 In the Project Browser. enter South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. select 1/8''=1'-0''. and double-click Level 1.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. expand Floor Plans. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 585 . click Section. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Section: Building Section. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. under Elevations. under Views (all). double-click South East.

586 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 587 . click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 24 Select gridline F. 588 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 23 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.21 On the Design Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. using the blue circular drag grip. and double-click Section 1.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 589 . you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. To create each view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.

double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Resulting callout view . under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. click Callout. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 590 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Floor Plan. for Scale. 4 On the Options Bar. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select 1/4"=1'-0''.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

and click to specify a point to complete the callout. and select the callout boundary.■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. click Modify. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. Creating Callout Views | 591 . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

9 In the Rename View dialog. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 592 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Select the middle grip. click Modify. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. enter Enlarged Stair Plan.

14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. Creating Callout Views | 593 . and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. for Scale. under Sections (Building Sections). 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. select Detail View: Detail. double-click Section 1. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout.

594 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). 17 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. enter Roof Overhang Detail.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. expand Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 595 . the elevation markers. You change the appearance of the section mark head. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.

. and can be applied to the section line. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. select the section line. select Custom-Section Head. and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Level 1. 10 On the floor plan. 12 For Section Tag. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. clear any others. under Floor Plans.Filled. click Load into Project. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. for Section Head. 4 On the Design Bar. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project.Custom. enter Section Head – Custom. click Edit/New.rfa. Section Tail . and click OK. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. click Training Files. and click OK twice. select the current project. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Head . Section Tail – Filled. 596 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags.

16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. . scroll to Section Line. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 597 . and select 2. click Duplicate. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll to Section Marks.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. For Dimensions ➤ Width. and click Open. Click OK. select 3. 19 Click OK. and click OK. On the floor plan. On the floor plan. and select 3.rfa. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. click Edit/New. 27 Click OK twice. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. select 3/4'' Circle. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. enter 3/4'' Circle. select Custom-Callout Head. 15 Under Category. For Line Weight. select Circle. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Elevation Tag. 17 Under Category. and on the Options Bar. notice the circular elevation markers that display. click the Annotation Objects tab. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. enter 3/4''. 22 In the Name dialog.

33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load into Project. click Duplicate. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. clear all others. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and on the Options Bar. and select 7. click Edit/New. for Callout Tag. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog.30 On the Design Bar. select the callout. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. select the current project. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. enter 1/4''. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 43 Under Category. 39 Click OK twice. 36 In the drawing. 34 In the Name dialog. Click OK. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. . click the Annotation Objects tab. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. For Corner Radius. and click OK. 40 Press ESC.

masking regions. Creating a View Template In this exercise. and visual overrides. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. You learn to create view templates.45 For Line Pattern. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. click Training Files. To accomplish this. 49 Click OK. select Dash. and select 4. and apply it to multiple elevation views. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. view regions. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings.rvt. filters. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. expand Callout Boundary. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 599 . 46 Under Category. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.

2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. under Elevations. under Visibility. The crop region displays as red. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 600 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 4 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom to Fit. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. and double-click East. click (Hide Crop Region).Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Entourage. 5 On the View Toolbar. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

click OK. 14 In the New View Template dialog. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. Creating a View Template | 601 . click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. right-click East. and section lines are now hidden in the view. and click OK. double-click North. under Elevations. 15 In the View Templates dialog.10 Under Visibility. 12 On the View Control bar. under Elevations. elevation markers. and click Create View Template From View. 13 In the Project Browser. Callouts. grids. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 16 In the Project Browser. levels.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Black and White Presentation Elevation.rvt. and click OK. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. edit the crop region as before. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. double-click Penthouse. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. under Floor Plans. 602 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. click Apply. 19 Using the same method. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Apply View Template. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.17 In the Project Browser. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. right-click North.

View Range and Plan Regions | 603 . for Bottom. Under View Depth. and click Properties. double-click Roof Plan. for View Range. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Penthouse. under Extents. for Level. Click OK twice. select Level Below (Level 4). right-click. select Level Below (Level 4). Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click Edit.

10 On the Design Bar. 604 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Edit. for Level. select Level 4. Click OK twice. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. click Lines. click Plan Region. under Extents. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Under View Depth. select Level 4. right-click. select Roof Plan. for View Range. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.6 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. for Bottom. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Unlimited.11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. select Unlimited. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Edit. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. for View Range. Under View Depth. Click OK twice. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Region Properties. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 605 . 17 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. for Level. for Bottom. under Extents. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. In the left corner of the building. 16 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. in this case. click Finish Sketch. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.

select Solid Fill. click <No Override>. select Fire Rating. 10 On the Filter tab. and click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. click the Filters tab. for Rated Walls. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. After you apply the filter. 5 In the Filters dialog. 14 In the Color dialog. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 Click OK. 11 Select Rated Walls. click Override under Patterns. click Add.rating of the walls. under Projection/Surface. Select contains. expand Floor Plans. under Categories. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Edit/New. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. select Walls. select the red color. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. under Views (all). and apply a color. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Basic colors. enter Rated Walls. 7 In the Filters dialog. 17 Using the same method. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Pattern. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Filters. for Color. and click OK. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. click (New). 16 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. 606 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Enter Hr.

Masking Portions of a View | 607 . you obscure geometry in portions of a view. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. To accomplish this. and click OK. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click OK.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click Remove. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 Select Copy of Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. under Floor Plans. as shown. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 5 On the View menu. 608 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click Show Crop Region. and click OK. right-click. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 8 Select the crop region. 12 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 11 In the Type Selector. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. select Invisible lines. click Masking Region. Masking Portions of a View | 609 .7 On the View menu. 9 On the View Control Bar.

NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 610 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. click Finish Sketch. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.14 On the Design Bar.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. under Floor Plans. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

under Visibility. and click Rename. select Walls. for Color. 11 Click OK twice. for Pattern. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 Under Cut.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click in the Patterns field. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click. and click 1/4''=1'0''. and click Override. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. right-click. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 611 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. click black. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click <No Override> to apply a color. select Solid fill. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Pattern Overrides. click the current scale. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.

Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. clear Grids. click Modify. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Floors. 612 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Under Visibility. under Visibility. 18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

Working with Visual Overrides | 613 . By using the previous method to make the selection. click a purple color. for Color. 25 Click OK twice. 21 Under Projection/Surface. click Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 23 In the Color dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click OK.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Lines. select Dash 1/16''. 20 Right-click. for Pattern.

select the sofa. 614 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click . right-click. select a bright green color. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. click Projection Lines. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Modify. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 28 For Color. and click OK twice. click By Category Override. 29 In the Color dialog.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.

33 On the View Control Bar. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. click .32 Select one of the lamps. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 615 . right-click. how to add views to the sheets. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.

The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets. right-click. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet.rvt. and click OK. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and click View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 616 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files.

click Modify. Creating Drawing Sheets | 617 . For Sheet Name. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. enter Site Plan. 7 On the Design Bar. and select the title block. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. on the Options Bar. click Modify.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Click OK. 5 When the title block highlights. enter A101. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Sheet Number. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties).Unnamed. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar.

enter For Approval. For Client Name. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter J. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 618 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 15 May. click Edit. Smith.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. For Project Number. enter 2009-1. enter Freighthouse Flats. 14 Click OK. For Project Name. For Project Status. under Other. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. MA 12345 12 Click OK. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. for Project Address. 2009.

create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 17 In the Project Browser. select the new sheet name.Layout Plan A104 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Sections A108 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.rvt. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. Adding Views to Sheets | 619 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Elevations A107 . and click OK. enter Floor Plan. and click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. you add views to these sheets.Stairs In the following exercise. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Elevations A105 .rvt. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click Rename. and click Save.Elevations A106 . right-click. for Name.

and drag it to the sheet. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. 620 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. The red border around the view no longer displays. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). select Level 1. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click A104 .Floor Plan.Elevations. 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place the view. double-click A102 . under Sheets (all). under Elevations (Building Elevation). The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.

7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). Adding Views to Sheets | 621 . double-click A107 . 12 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. click Modify. click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet.Sections. and click to place it.

click Modify. . zoom in to the grip. for View Scale.Stairs. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. 622 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 16 Select title bar. under Sheets (all). Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. move the cursor over it. 18 Under Floor Plans. and click OK. and press TAB until it highlights. and on the Options Bar. double-click A108 . 19 On the Design Bar.

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. you must first activate the view on the sheet.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. under Floor Plans. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 623 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. In order to do this. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 1. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.

2 Select the building section view. double-click A107 .rvt. and press ENTER. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. 624 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.Sections. and click Activate View. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. click Modify.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all). enter 54'. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.

7 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View.6 Right-click. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 625 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click North.

The camera view displays. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Click OK. 626 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. right-click. enter T. under Floor Plans. select the new sheet name. double-click Level 1. enter Title Sheet. click Camera. You modify the view to hide the view title.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. For Sheet Name. 7 Place the camera as shown. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and click Properties.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. After you create the sheet.

enter 420'. Click OK. Under Camera. Under Extents. enter 5'.8 On the Options Bar. For Far Clip Offset. select Far Clip Active. enter 60'. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 627 . 12 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. For Target Elevation. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. for Eye Elevation. 11 On the View Control Bar.

Under Model Crop Size. on the Options Bar. click Size.13 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. enter 25''. double-click T . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet.Title Sheet. for Height. under Sheets (all). and then click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). 15 With the view selected. Click Apply. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 628 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 Under 3D Views.

and click OK. 24 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. enter Viewport/no title mark. and on the Options Bar. and close the exercise file. select No. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 19 Select the view on the sheet. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Name dialog. for Show title. under Graphics. 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 629 .

630 .

you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.Tagging and Scheduling 11 In this tutorial. Tagging Objects In this lesson. such as doors and windows. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as room and window schedules.Level 1. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.rvt. You also learn to create different types of schedules. Because of the open style floor plan. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. in your Revit MEP 2009 projects. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 631 . expand Floor Plans.

move the cursor to the right. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 632 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. as shown: 5 Using the same method. click Room Separation. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Room and Area.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 633 .6 Using the same method. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Tags dialog.

Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. indicating that it can be edited. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click OK. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view.rfa. 11 In the Tags dialog. type 8'. type U18-1. and select the room tag. 14 For Offset. click Room. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. click it. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and click to place the room and tag. The room tag number displays in blue. 634 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. and press ENTER.

Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. type Entry. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 635 . Dining. 22 Click the room text label. click Modify. 23 Using the same method. click Modify. type Kitchen. 19 On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag.18 Click the room text label. and press ENTER. Sequential letters are also supported. click Room. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. place rooms and tags.

and click OK. click Room Tag. on the Model Categories tab. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. 636 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Unit 18 Plan . but they need to be tagged. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 27 On the Design Bar.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The rooms are already placed. click Modify. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).Level 2. and moving clockwise. clear Room Separation. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser.

30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 637 . click Tag ➤ By Category. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. clear Leader. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.rvt.Level 1. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. you learn how to place door and window tags. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .

■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. under Identify Data. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. click Properties). 638 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . type U18-2. and on the Options Bar. for Mark. click Modify. and click OK. and press ENTER. type U18-1. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

and drag it down to center it in the doorway. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. Tagging Doors and Windows | 639 . rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.9 Using one of the methods you just learned.

and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Door Tags. click Training Files. 22 In the Tags dialog. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. 20 In the Tags dialog. and click OK. click Load. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and click OK. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser. select Window Tags.rfa. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged.Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. click OK. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Category. expand Floor Plans. verify that All objects in current view is selected. 640 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .

click Yes to load a tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. 4 Select a dining room chair. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. select the edge to which the leader connects. Tagging Other Objects | 641 . 28 Using the same method. tag all untagged windows. 26 Under Floor Plans. click Training Files. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 5 At the confirmation prompt. you learn how to tag furniture objects. select Leader. 3 On the Options Bar.rfa. 29 Save the file. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise.Level 1. and modify the tag placement and display. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.

and drag it above the chair tag. 11 Select the tag for the table. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 12 Click the elbow control. and drag it up to form an angled leader. clear Leader. 642 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 9 Click Modify. 13 Optionally. 14 Click Modify.8 Select the furniture in the living room. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. and on the Options Bar.

18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Tagging Other Objects | 643 .Level 2.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. and on the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Tag All Not Tagged. under Floor Plans. select Furniture Tag : Standard. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. click Modify.

21 In the Filter dialog. and click Modify. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 22 In the Type Selector. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram.20 On the Options Bar. you learn to add schedules. select Furniture Tags. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. click Check None. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. 644 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click (Filter Selection). and click OK. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. 23 Save the file.

that is.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Next. Finally. a schedule that lists every window in the building. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Creating a Window Schedule | 645 . you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in which windows are listed by window type.

and click OK. 7 Using the same method. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 646 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. type Building Window Schedule. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 4 For Name. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Windows. and click View. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click Schedule/Quantities. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Comments and click Add. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. under Category. and double-click Level 1. 6 Under Available fields.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 9 Click OK. click the Fields tab. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. click Close. and on the Options Bar. you are prompted to open one that does. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. right-click the schedule. If no open view shows the selected element. click Show. Creating a Window Schedule | 647 . in large building models with many views. expand Schedules/Quantities.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. 13 In the Project Browser. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. this can be a time-consuming process. NOTE By clicking Show. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. and click View Properties.

for Sorting/Grouping. 648 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. sorted by type mark. The window schedule is displayed. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. 23 Click OK twice. click Edit. clear Itemize every instance. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. The window type schedule is displayed. for Sorting/Grouping. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. under Other. and click View Properties. under Other.15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sort by. and press ENTER. click Edit.

rvt. and sill conditions for a window can be found. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. expand Schedules/Quantities. unlike shared parameters.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and double-click Building Window Schedule. under Floor Plans. jamb. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.rvt. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 649 . you cannot use them to tag objects. In this case. double-click Level 2. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.

under Available fields. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. select the following fields. click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. 12 Click OK twice. select Construction. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. click Edit. and click Properties. so that they are listed before Comments. type Head Detail. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. under Other. Select Type. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. 5 Click OK. 650 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Add to create the new parameter. for Fields.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. for Name. 6 Using the same method. right-click Building Window Schedule. Under Parameter Data. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. expand Floor Plans. for Head Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers.Level 1. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. type 2/A107. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select Doors. type Unit 18 . select Head Detail. for Jamb Detail. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. and Sill Detail. For example. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click in the Head Detail header. Under Name. under Type Mark A. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 Save the file. type 1/A107.Door Schedule. 14 On the Options Bar. You then hide the column used for the filter.rvt. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. type 3/A107. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 651 . Jamb Detail. and for Sill Detail. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. click Group. and without releasing the left mouse button. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. type Window Details.

Unit 18. select the following fields. 6 Under Available fields. 11 Under Field formatting.■ For Phase. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. but is not included as a column in the schedule. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). select Family and Type. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click A102 . 9 Click the Formatting tab. Type U18 in the third field. Select contains in the second field. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. expand Sheets (all). and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 652 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. select Mark. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that New Construction is selected. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. select Hidden field. 4 Click OK. click the Fields tab. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. 10 Under Fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with.

and drag it to the sheet. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 653 . click Modify. click Unit 18 . The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. click Modify.13 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. 19 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar.Door Schedule. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 654 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click View. double-click Level 1. and click Add. under Available fields. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. to the right of Header text. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Rooms. under Floor Plans.20 Save the file. select Number. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. and click OK. 5 Using the same method. 7 Under Text. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. under Category. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. select Bold. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. right-click in the Design Bar. 8 Click OK.

select Storage. add 5 more rooms. for room 101. For 104. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. select Corridor. next to Rows. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. type Corridor. 101-106. For 105. 11 Using the same method. For 106. and press ENTER. For 103. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 102. click New. and press ENTER. for Name.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. type Stair. and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. type Building Entry. The room Number is U17-46. 10 Edit the number to be 101. type Storage. and press ENTER. Creating a Room Schedule | 655 .

double-click Level 1. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. draw the horizontal line. 4 Click OK twice. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. For Weight. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 656 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. place rooms from a program list. select 9. click the Lines field. click the Color field. you add room separation lines. Under Custom colors. under Floor Plans. In the Line Graphics dialog. and modify room names. and click OK. under Projection/Surface.13 Save the file. click Room Separation. click the bright green swatch. In the Lines field. First. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. For Room Separation. expand Lines. click Override.

8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 657 . Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. for Room. type 8'. 14 For Offset.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 11 On the Options Bar. for Room. select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. 658 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).

under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Room Schedule.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. and zoom in to the Corridor. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. 16 Using the same method. double-click Level 1. click Modify. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). 20 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 17 On the Design Bar. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 659 . as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 19 In the Project Browser. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. place the following rooms. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

click 23 On the Design Bar. for Rows. click New. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 31 For Key Name. and Wall Finish. and for all 3 finishes. under Available fields. 24 Open the Room Schedule. select Rooms. and click OK. under Category. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. click Modify. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. (Element Properties). type As Selected. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 660 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. under Constraints. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. type Units.21 On the Options Bar. clear Room Bounding. 27 Select Schedule keys. Floor Finish. select Base Finish. while pressing CTRL. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.

35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Available fields. and click Add. 44 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Identity Data. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 661 . 38 Under U17-8. 33 In the Project Browser.32 Using the same method. 37 Open the Room Schedule. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). and click Properties. for Fields. under Schedules/Quantities. 43 In the Filter dialog. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 42 On the Options Bar. 36 Click OK twice. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. under Other. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Room Schedule. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select Units. select Units. click (Element Properties). Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. for Room Style. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. select Room Style. click Check None. select Rooms. for Room Style. click Edit.

4 In the New color scheme dialog. click OK. and double-click Level 1. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Views (all). expand Floor Plans. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan).rvt. right-click Level 1. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. at the warning prompt. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 9 In the Project Browser. For rooms 102 and 105. select Room Style. type Room Type. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.46 Open the Room Schedule. 662 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. under Floor Plans. under Graphics. select Public. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. click 5 For Title. and click OK. select Service. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. (Duplicate). for Name. type Room Type. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and 106. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click OK. 48 Save the file. 103. click the Color Scheme field. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. for Color. 104. and click Properties.

click Color Scheme Legend. click the value in the Color column. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. under Visibility. select the color legend. click Edit. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). and clear Room Separation. clear Visible.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. expand Lines. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Edit Color Scheme. under Schemes. 14 Click OK twice. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 663 . a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select Room Type. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public).

select blue. type 1''. under Graphics. click Edit/New. 23 Using the same method. (Element Properties). and select Show Title. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 664 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. on the Options Bar. 29 Click OK twice. 24 Click OK. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Under Title Text. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. respectively. for Size. under Custom color. type 1/4''.22 In the Color dialog. and click OK. for Swatch Width.

volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. and select Properties. select Room Type. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 665 . for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. for Color Scheme. double-click Building Section. click Color Scheme Legend. click Edit. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. and click OK. right-click Building Section. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. under Graphics. under Visibility. under Sections. under Sections. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. 35 Click OK twice. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

45 While pressing CTRL. for Room Style. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 46 Click . for Room Style. and click OK. click Check None. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104).40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. select Units. select Public. 42 In the Filter dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. click . under Identity Data. under Identity Data. select all the rooms in the stairwell. 666 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . (Filter Selection).

for Rows. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 667 . 49 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 54 While pressing CTRL. under Schedules/Quantities. type Suites.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. and click OK. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. 51 On the Options Bar. excluding the stairwell spaces. under Key Name for the new row. double-click Room Style Schedule. click New. and click . Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. select Service. for Room Style. under Identity Data.

55 Click . select the room on the left side of the top floor. for Room Style. 59 Under Room Area Computation. The color fill will extend to the roof. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 668 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Volume Computations. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. verify that At wall finish is selected. but not beyond it. and click OK. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. and click OK. under Identity Data. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. select Suites. select Areas and Volumes. The color fill extends to the roof.

72 On the Design Bar. for Upper Limit. and click 65 For Limit Offset. type -10”. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 669 . click Modify. select the stairwell room. under Constraints. 70 For Limit Offset. 67 On the first level. and the living room. 71 Click OK. 68 Click . select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). . the dining room. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. type 0’ 0” . select Level 2. 66 Click OK.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. under Constraints. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. select Loft.

73 Save the file. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. 670 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. double-click {3D}. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Material: Description. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. under Available fields. and click Add. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Clear Itemize every instance. click Family and Type. 9 Using the same method.EPDM. 4 In the Type Selector. For Then by. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Family and Type. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.Insulation on Plywood Deck . click Modify. under Category. 5 On the Design Bar.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Select Grand totals. select Roofs. Creating a Material Takeoff | 671 . select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . and click OK. 3 While pressing CTRL. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.

19 For Type. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. under Available fields. for Fields. select Currency. 21 Click OK.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. for Material: Cost. click the Formatting tab.50 1. select Calculate totals. and under Fields. 12 Click OK. select Material: Area. under Other. for Name. select Material: Cost. and click Properties. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 23 For Field formatting. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and click OK twice. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). Under Field formatting.75 672 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. type Estimated Cost.25 4. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 20 For Formula. and click Add. select Calculate totals. click Edit. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 17 Click Calculated Value. click Estimated Cost. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff.

either within family components or within the project template. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. 31 Save the file. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. adding the shared parameters to a family. 29 Select Use digit grouping. 28 For Unit symbol. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. 26 In the Project Units dialog. In this lesson. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. tag the line. You draw a travel path line. and are defined and stored in an external file. creating a generic tag to tag the family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. These shared parameters can be added to any family.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . you create a shared parameter file. 27 In the Format dialog. click the Format value. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. can be used for any number-based parameter. and reporting the shared parameters. which inserts commas after every three digits. for Currency. 30 Click OK twice. Digit grouping. and schedule the total distance of each path. select $. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. you create an exiting plan for the building.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. regardless of category. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 673 . not just for currency. for Rounding. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson.

type Travel Distance. select Length. click Training Files. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. and click OK. 11 Click OK twice. click New. for File name.rvt. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. under Groups. type OfficeStandardsParameters. type Path ID. type Exiting. click Create. for Name. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. click Training Files.rvt. for Type of Parameter. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click New. click New. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Under Parameters.txt. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 674 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. and click Save. 7 Under Parameters.

4 In the Family Types dialog. 11 Click OK. for Group parameter under. group it under Dimensions. select Constraints. under Dimensions. 15 If necessary. and click OK. 10 Using the same method.rvt. select Shared parameter. click Family Types. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click Select. in the Load into Projects dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. following the equals symbol (=). 13 Click Apply. otherwise the family loads into the current project. under Parameters. type Length. click Load into Projects. and select Instance. click Add.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. for Travel Distance Formula. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. If you have multiple projects open. under Parameter Data. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameter Type. under Parameters. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. Click Training Files. click Add. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. You then create a generic tag to tag the family.rfa. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 675 .rvt. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 8 Select Instance. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line.

click parameter(s) to label).rft. click Select. select Travel Distance. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select Travel Distance. click Label. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. and click OK. 24 Click OK twice. click Training Files. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click (Add Parameter). under Category Parameters. click Label. under Parameters. 676 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 19 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.

and press DELETE. and click OK. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.rvt is selected. select Path ID. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and click Save. click Modify. 33 On the Design Bar. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. click Load into Projects. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 677 . type Travel Distance Tag. 32 In the Save As dialog. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.28 On the Design Bar. 35 Save the file. 29 In the drawing window.rfa. and move it down. for File Name.

under Floor Plans. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. double-click Exiting Plan .Placing.Level 1. above the exterior door as shown. click Component.Tagging. select Chain. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. and click in the center of the corridor. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. After the lines are tagged. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 6 Move the cursor to the right. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 678 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .

verify that Chain is selected. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Component. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Placing.7 Move the cursor down. click Modify. and click outside of the building. and click OK. 13 While pressing CTRL. clear Leader.Tagging. 17 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 679 . and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. through the door. click Modify.Level 2. for Path ID. 12 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. move the cursor near the right corner. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click (Element Properties). select the 2 dashed travel lines. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. double click Exiting Plan . type 1-1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

move the cursor to the left. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 680 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click. and click above the door to the stair. click Modify.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 23 Move the cursor down. click Component. 20 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. 21 On the Design Bar.

25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 681 . and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Category. and click OK. under Constraints. . Placing. 30 Using the same method. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. click Modify. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. click Tag ➤ By Category. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 27 On the Design Bar.Tagging. click Modify. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.24 On the Design Bar. type 2-1. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 33 For Name. type Level 1 Exit Distance. 28 While pressing CTRL. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. for Path ID. and click OK.

in the first field. 41 Under Fields. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click Rename. 43 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. for Filter. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Add. under Available fields. 42 Click OK. in the second field. and in the third field. select Path ID. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 44 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. type 1-. click Edit. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Travel Distance. under Other. while pressing CTRL. type 2-. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 46 In the Project Browser. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. under Schedules/Quantities. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. for Filter by. 49 Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Path ID and Travel Distance. and under Field formatting. select contains. 682 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 35 Click the Filter tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. select Path ID. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. in the third field.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. 50 Save the file. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 36 For Filter by. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 38 For Sort by.

Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.6''. and click OK. under Categories. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 683 . under Identity Data. right-click Generic . expand C . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. right-click the Design Bar. and select C1010145 . 4 Under Available fields. select Walls.Fixed Partitions. click the Value field. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Partitions .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. click Schedule/Quantities. 10 In the schedule. and click . and click View.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Interiors ➤ C10 . for Assembly Code. select the following fields. 9 Click OK twice.

mdb. 9 Under Directories. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. type Revit_Project.mdb). 3 Click New. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. select a location for the database file.rvt. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 684 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. click Create. and click Next. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays.11 Close the exercise file. 8 In the New Database dialog. click OK. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. under Database. 11 Click OK 3 times. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. and click Next. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 1 On the File menu. and click OK to create the database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Database Name. the database display may be different than that shown. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 6 Click Finish. click Training Files. click the File Data Source tab.

The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule.Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. Additionally. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 685 . In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. For example. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. 13 Close the exercise file. in addition to the Id column. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.

686 .

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 687 . Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.Annotating and Dimensioning 12 In this tutorial. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2009 projects.

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'. 688 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.

8 Select the Level 1 line. click Training Files. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. The levels in the project are not shared. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project.rvt. Under Constraints. However. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. If you did that now. and double-click South. select Shared. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. click (Element Properties). and click OK. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. Relocating a Project | 689 . expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. type 1/4'' Head . only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. 6 Click OK twice. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Elevation Base. click Edit/New. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. In the Name dialog.Shared Elevation.

10 On the View menu. and press ENTER. select Level : 1/4'' Head . The elevation of the other levels remains the same.By selecting the Level 1 line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. you specify the new location of the project. The base elevation now reads 325'. 690 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . type 325'. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 12 In the Type Selector. By typing 325' in this step. The south elevation is displayed.Shared Elevation. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line.

The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. 14 In the Project Browser. as well as other views of the building model. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. and the Roof Plan level. under Elevations. Relocating a Project | 691 . the Penthouse level. select Levels 2-4. double-click North.

In this case. In Revit MEP. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. Dimensioning on page 692. permanent dimensions are created automatically. click Modify. multi-segmented. Dimensioning In this lesson. 692 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 16 If you want to save your changes.■ ■ In the Type Selector. On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. You place linear. select Level : 1/4'' Head . radial. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. and angular dimensions. click File menu ➤ Save As.Shared Elevation. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. and save the exercise file with a unique name. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. 17 Proceed to the next lesson.

and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. select it. By default. Creating Dimensions | 693 . click Dimension.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and are created by selecting individual reference points. dimensions are aligned. expand Views (all). snap to wall centerlines.

select it. 5 Move the cursor above the view. and click to place the dimension.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. 694 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall.

indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. click Dimension. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked. Creating Dimensions | 695 . click Modify. and select it.

14 Move the cursor to the right. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. and select its left exterior face. for Prefer. select the right side of the curtain wall. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. select the right endpoint of the planter. 16 Move the cursor up. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. above the plan view of the building. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 696 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Wall Faces.11 Using the same method. but below the first dimension that you placed. 12 On the Options Bar.

3/32" Arial . click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New.3/32" Arial . click Duplicate. click Duplicate. for Dimension String Type. Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Dimension String Type. and on the Options Bar. under Graphics.Baseline. . and click OK. select Ordinate. Creating Dimensions | 697 . and click OK.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. enter Linear . click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 18 On the Basics tab. select Baseline. enter Linear . 27 Click OK twice.Ordinate. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. 25 In the Name dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.

for Below. verify that Use Actual Value is selected.3/32" Arial . 698 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . enter Planter. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. 34 Click OK. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. for example Text dialog displays. to the left. 30 In the Type Selector.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. 33 Under Text Fields. select Linear .29 Select the dimension string. and in the Type Selector. under Dimension Value. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.Baseline. . or to the right of a permanent dimension value. below. select Linear .

41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. Creating Dimensions | 699 . 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. click Dimension. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights.35 On the Design Bar. For Prefer. click Modify. click Modify. and specify a point to place the dimension. and select it. select Wall faces. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 37 On the Design Bar. Place a radial dimension with a Typ.

700 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click the dimension text. 44 With the dimension still selected. type Typ. and click OK.42 Select the radial dimension. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. click Modify. for Suffix. 46 On the Basics tab..

This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). Creating Dimensions | 701 . verify that Wall faces is selected. 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Prefer. 50 Select the horizontal line.

rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and click to place the dimension. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3. expand Views (all). 53 On the Basics tab. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. When you dimension the wall. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 702. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. you select only the wall.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 702 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 54 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click to place the automatic dimension string. For Pick. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. click Dimension. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 703 . Click OK. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Walls. select Openings. select Wall centerlines. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. and select Widths. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. Click Options.

you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. in some cases. However. expand Views (all). Controlling Witness Lines on page 704. click Modify. When you place dimensions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. For example. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise.7 On the Basics tab. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 704 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. for a multi-segmented dimension. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. expand Floor Plans.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. select Individual References. For Pick. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. verify Wall centerlines is selected.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. Controlling Witness Lines | 705 . and select it.

7 Using the same method. and select it. 706 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the bottom right endpoint. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. and click to place the dimension. 10 Using the same method. move the cursor down. select the right edge of the planter.

11 Move the cursor down. Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. select Wall centerlines. Controlling Witness Lines | 707 . click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar. and specify a point to place the dimension. select it. for Prefer. and when the wall centerline highlights. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan.

select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. click Modify. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 708 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .15 Moving the cursor to the right. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. 18 While pressing SHIFT. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 Release SHIFT. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. and click to place the dimension. and drag the dimension down the wall.

you change the dimension tick mark. text font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 709 . 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 22 On the Basics tab. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 709. and using the same methods.20 Click the blue middle grip. After you create the new family type. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. drag it to the right. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. click Modify.

710 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select the lower dimension. 5 In the Name dialog.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. select Arrow 30 Degree. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 2 Click (Element Properties). Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. type Office Standard. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. for Tick Mark. and click OK. click Duplicate.

NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. click Modify. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. for Text Size.■ ■ Under Text. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 711 . 10 On the Basics tab. 9 In the Type Selector. For Text Font. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. type 1/8”. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. click Modify. select another font. select CityBlueprint. 7 On the Basics tab. ■ Click OK twice. and select the bottom dimension.

12 Proceed to the next lesson. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. and how to add leaders to the text notes. 712 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Text Annotation on page 712.11 Using the same method. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. create a new angular dimension type. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. select the angular dimension on the planter.

rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. but below the upper dimension string. and click and drag to create a text box. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. click (None). zoom to the planter near grid line 5. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. click Text. for Leader. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 713 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

714 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 11 Under Text. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. and click OK. under Graphics. click Modify. for Text Size. 7 Select the text box. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. If so. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. type EXISTING BUILDING.5 In the text box. select Arc Leaders. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 10 In the Name dialog box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. type 1/4''. click Edit/New.

15 On the Design Bar.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. click Text. click Modify. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 715 . A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. and type Planting Bed. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

for New. type Standard Notes.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. and click OK. Click OK twice. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. Under Text. select CityBlueprint. click Modify. 716 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . In the Rename dialog. Click Rename. click Edit/New. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Text Font. for Leader Arrowhead. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. Under Graphics. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders.

click Text. click (Arc). click to place the text box. select Text: Standard Notes. over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. Wall. and click Modify. 27 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the text box. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. and type 18'' Conc. 26 In the Type Selector. for Leader. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 717 .

718 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name.32 If you want to save your changes. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.

using detail components to represent materials like lumber. In the callout view. like a standard door header condition. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. In order to detail from the building model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building.Detailing 13 In this tutorial. These components display at the required scale. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and metal studs. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2009. you trace over the building model geometry. add detail components. plywood. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. 719 .

and insulation objects. Exact location is not important. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. 5 In the alert dialog.Detailing the View In this exercise. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The roof overhang detail displays.rfa. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and click OK. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. you detail the view of the roof edge. as well as detail lines. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You load detail components. select As underlay. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 720 | Chapter 13 Detailing . which means that all detail components. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click the detail callout head. In the left pane of the Open dialog. region objects. click Training Files. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.rvt. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. and click Open. They are also view specific. click Detail Component. 7 In the drawing area. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. After you add components. click Training Files. for Graphics ➤ Display Model.

12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. enter 1' 4". Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Repeating Detail. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.8 Delete the component. 17 In the drawing area. click (Element Properties). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click OK twice. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 13 In the Name dialog. Detailing the View | 721 . click Duplicate. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select Corrugated Metal. 15 For Spacing. 10 On the Options Bar. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail.

click Load. ■ ■ Click Modify. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.19 On the Design Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. and click Open. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 22 On the Options Bar.rfa. 24 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click (Move). 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. and on the Edit toolbar. click Training Files. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 722 | Chapter 13 Detailing .

32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 30 In the Type Selector. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. click OK. 33 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Training Files. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. click Detail Component. and click Open.Because you still have several components to load. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 31 To properly orient the component.rvt. and place it in the detail view as shown. Detailing the View | 723 . you load them as a group from a single file.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Chain.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 37 Click Modify. 724 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. click the Flip instance arrows.

click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Detailing the View | 725 . enter 5 1/2". select to near side.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. click Insulation. 42 Click Modify. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. (Move). For Offset.

50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 47 In the Type Selector. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component.■ Click Modify. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. and lock the component. click Detail Component. 45 In the Type Selector. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 726 | Chapter 13 Detailing . as shown. select Plywood-Section : 3/4". Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 51 Click Modify.

4 Click Modify. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Like detail components. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. as shown. For Offset. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. select Thin Lines. Adding Detail Lines | 727 . click Detail Lines. enter 1/4". Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. select Thin Lines. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise.52 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. 7 In the Type Selector.rvt. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. Adding Detail Lines on page 727. meaning they display only in this view. 2 In the Type Selector. you add lines to your detail. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. they are view specific. and press ENTER.

enter 1/4". click (Draw). For Offset.10 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 11 In the Type Selector. 16 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. select Chain. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. as shown. and clear Chain. as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown. 728 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. click Detail Lines. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar.

24 On the View Control Bar. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select the Penthouse level line. 22 In the Project Browser.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and click OK. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. select Do not display. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. When you turn the display model off. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Type Selector. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. draw the detail lines as shown. right-click. select Thin Lines. and click Properties. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Adding Detail Lines | 729 .

select Break Line. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. click Detail Component. 730 | Chapter 13 Detailing . enter 1/2". TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 30 In the Type Selector.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Vapor Barrier. 29 On the Design Bar. For Offset. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. click Detail Lines. 26 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.

Click again to specify the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes | 731 . click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. you add text notes to complete the detail. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Enter the text. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes on page 731.32 Click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask.rvt. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. click Text.

under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Rename. 8 Select the dimension line. and press DELETE. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. (Filter Selection). 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. right-click. select a text note. click Roof Overhang Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. under Text Fields. click Select All Instances. and click the dimension text. for Suffix. and click OK. right-click. Creating Detail Components on page 732. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.Keynotes. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. on the Options Bar. and click OK.. enter Typ. and save the exercise file. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. right-click.rvt. and click OK. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 732 | Chapter 13 Detailing . enter Roof Overhang Detail .7 Click Modify.

14 Click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. in the Type Selector. pressing TAB. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 15 Use a window to select all linework. click Training Files. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 7 Click Modify. select all the coping linework.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. 16 Click Modify. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.rft. and click Open. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. Creating Detail Components | 733 . while pressing CTRL. select Medium Lines. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and selecting the chain.

23 Using a window. and click OK. navigate to your preferred location. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 24 On the Options Bar. and the component can be placed in the detail. 27 On the Design Bar. 21 To place the component. 22 Click Modify.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Detail Component.Keynotes view is not the open view. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the coping. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. and click Open. delete the underlying linework. The original linework remains selected. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. click Load into Projects. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 734 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 26 Press DELETE. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. 25 In the Filter dialog.rfa. click . The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. While pressing SHIFT. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . clear Detail Items. 30 In the drawing area. for File name. Adding Keynotes on page 735. click Training Files. click Load. double-click it in the Project Browser. enter Roof Edge. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. 31 Using the same method used previously. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

rfa. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.D11. click Training Files. For the metal coping. use keynote 07645. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3/4" Plywood. Roof Edge4. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. you place keynotes on objects. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. and click Open.C1.rvt. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. Adding Keynotes | 735 . Click to place the leader arm.B5. and click OK. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. use keynote 06160. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. In the Keynotes dialog. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. 2 In the alert dialog.

16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.D11. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.I1. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . For the 2x6.6 Click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 06160.F1. For the 2x8. FasciaProfile_1.D1.F1. use keynote 06110. select Corrugated Metal. click Detail Component. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.20 Ga. and click . click Edit/New. You do this in order to keynote the component. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 18 Save the file. use keynote 06110. 17 Keynote the component. 15 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 737. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. using keynote 07460. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 736 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties).G1. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.A8. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. For the 2x12. navigate to 07645. 11 Click OK 3 times. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 06110. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. use keynote 09250. click in the Value column. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard.

and select the right end point. select the left end point of the reference line. click Load. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 737 . 20 Click OK 3 times. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Medium Line Detail Component. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 16 Select the component. 8 In the Save As dialog. select Medium Lines. 4 In the Type Selector. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 9 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 19 In the Name dialog. 5 In the drawing area.rft.rvt. 11 Press DELETE. 22 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. and click Open. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. for File name.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 13 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 15 Click Modify. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 6 Lock the line. and click Modify. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. navigate to your preferred location. click Detail Component. click Lines. and click (Element Properties). click Edit/New.

name the component 2 x 8 Framing. and click . invisible. click Detail Component. 24 While pressing CTRL. 25 Next. select i_Light Line Detail Component. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. and click OK. and click Open. and assign it keynote 06110. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 48 Using the same method used previously. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and assign it keynote 07260. and click . Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 34 In the Name dialog. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 Click Modify. click Edit/New. and click . 43 Zoom to the repeating component. name the component Air Barrier. (Move). 47 Select the component. 27 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. and click the lower end at the break line. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. click Duplicate. 46 Click Modify. 28 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. click in the Value column.G1. i_Invisible Line Detail Component. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. on the Edit toolbar. 38 On the Design Bar. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. and i_Light Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 738 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 42 Using the same method used previously. 29 In the drawing area. 30 Click Modify. 44 On the Design Bar.A5. 41 Select the component just added. and click . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and hidden) used in the view. 37 Click OK 3 times. against the 3/4" plywood. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail.A1.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 31 Select the component. 49 With the component selected. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. enter EPDM Membrane.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 739 . 52 In the Type Selector. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 55 Click Modify. 53 On the Options Bar. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. leaving the detail component lines.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. select Chain. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. click Detail Component. and click .

2 x 8 Framing. 61 In the drawing area.A4. select Invisible Lines. click Load into Projects. and Vapor Barrier. 67 In the Type Selector. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. in the Type Selector. click Keynote ➤ Element. Air Barrier. click Detail Component. name the component Vapor Barrier. 740 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component.rfa. 60 On the Design Bar. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 63 In the drawing area.58 Using the method used previously. 68 In the drawing area. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. select the component. and assign it keynote 07260.

The descriptive text for each keynote displays.A1. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and press ENTER. click to place the leader. name the component Batt Insul. select all the keynotes.rvt.A1. navigate to 07463. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.txt. and click to place the note. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 741 . and click . You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. under Path Type. In the Type Selector. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). and click Open. and assign it keynote 07210. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit.A4. Enter 07460. 72 Save the file.. Enter 07463.txt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 741. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. and press TAB. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. click Browse. and click OK. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 3 In the text editor.A9. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. add a keynote for the component. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click OK. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. select Absolute. under Keynote Table. 11 Click Modify. 70 Using the method used previously. and press TAB. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.69 Select the component. 71 In the drawing area. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. Each keynote displays as a simple number. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. The database file opens in a text editor. and close the text editor. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 In the drawing area. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes.

Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. The detail that you import is in DWG format. For Positioning. 14 Save the file. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. and click OK. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that Auto . you learn how to create a drafted detail. select 3" = 1'-0". i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. After you create a drafting view. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.rvt.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. For Colors.Center to Center is selected. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. for Scale. 742 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. click Training Files. 13 Click Modify. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. select Black and White.dwg. These details do not update with changes to the building model.

8 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. Creating a Reference Callout on page 743. 5 Click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. click Callout. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select Reference other view. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. The detail is imported as an import symbol. and click OK. right-click Drafting 1. 6 Select the callout. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).rvt. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. enter EPDM Metal Coping. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.■ Click Open. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Creating a Reference Callout | 743 . and click Rename.

and click Properties./Details.Elev.No Reference).Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. for New. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 744 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 10 In the Rename dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . delete the existing value. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.No Reference. click Edit/New. click Rename. enter Detail . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label./Sect. The callout is updated with the sheet information. and click OK. 12 Click OK twice. double-click A105 . click Modify. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and double-click the callout.

Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 745 . Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. for Name. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 745 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0".rvt. click Detail Component. enter Header @ Sliding Door. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.18 Save the file. and click OK.

click Filled Region. click Duplicate. for Name. and enter 5/8". enter Gyp. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Select the left edge of the region. click . 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.5 In the Type Selector. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 20 On the Design Bar. Board. select Gypsum-Plaster. 17 Click Modify. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Region Properties. select the width dimension. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 18 While pressing CTRL. 746 | Chapter 13 Detailing . On the Options Bar. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 19 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. select Wide Lines. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 11 In the Name dialog. 14 Click OK 3 times. and click OK. Draw a rectangle as shown. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6.

24 Select the mirrored region. (Draw). click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. and click above the top of the region as the end point.Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 747 . Move the cursor up. click 22 On the Options Bar.

click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Draw a rectangle as shown. select Wood . click Region Properties. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. verify that the thickness is 3/4". 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 33 Click OK 3 times. click (Align). click Filled Region. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Duplicate. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. select Medium Lines. click Edit/New. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 30 In the Name dialog.Finish. and select the right edge of the wood region.25 Click Modify. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . enter Wood . 748 | Chapter 13 Detailing . in the Type Selector.Finish. and click OK. click (Rectangle). for Name. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar.

For Offset. verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 42 On the Design Bar.37 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. click . 40 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. sketch the new region as shown. click Ref Plane. enter 1/4". Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 749 . You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Finish Sketch. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. and press ENTER. 38 On the Design Bar.

46 On the Tools toolbar. click 48 Click Modify. and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 1'. (Align). Move the cursor right 1". and press ENTER. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Move the cursor left 1". click Filled Region. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. and click to select the point. enter 0. For Offset. and click to select the point. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. enter 3/8". 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. For Offset. 750 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 47 Click the reference plane. 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Select Chain. and press ENTER.

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click Detail Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 751 . 58 In the Type Selector. 56 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. and select the bottom horizontal line.54 On the Tools toolbar. 60 Select the left. For Offset. enter 1/8". top. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. click (Trim/Extend). and right edges of the door panel region.

62 Select the left detail line. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. enter 3".rfa. 69 Select the bolt. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 65 On the Options Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. click Detail Component. 752 | Chapter 13 Detailing . drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. and press ENTER. click Training Files. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.61 Click Modify. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load. select the height dimension. and click Open. 68 Click Modify.

navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side.70 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. click Detail Lines. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 80 On the Options Bar.rfa. click Training Files. use the images as a guide. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 753 . 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Component. 76 In the Type Selector. click Load. 79 In the Type Selector. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. select Wide Lines. click . Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 78 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. 74 Select the expansion bolt. and click Open. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6.

click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar. click . 754 | Chapter 13 Detailing .82 Select the rectangle. 87 Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. 84 On the Design Bar. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. (Mirror). drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 755 . as shown. 90 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines.89 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 92 Select the line. click (Mirror).

click . click Detail Component. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. select Break Line. click Detail Lines. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. select the length dimension. 95 On the Design Bar. 102 In the Type Selector. 103 Add two break lines as shown. and click to place the arc as shown. 97 On the Options Bar.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 101 On the Design Bar. 756 | Chapter 13 Detailing . draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. enter 1/8". 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 99 Click Modify. and press ENTER.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 757 . click Dimension. click Duplicate. 105 In the drawing area. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select To the nearest 1/16". 106 Click to place the dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 107 Select the dimension line. For Rounding. 113 Click OK 3 times. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. for Text ➤ Units Format. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. 114 On the Design Bar. Select Suppress 0 Feet. The dimension display is updated. and on the Options Bar.3/32" Arial. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify. click Dimension. 110 In the Name dialog. click in the Value column. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. the new style displays only inches. and click OK. . enter Detail Linear .Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New.

3/32”Arial. and then click the dimension text. 120 Under Text Fields. 758 | Chapter 13 Detailing . drag the text for the smaller dimension. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. select Replace With Text. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and click Modify. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 117 Select the dimension line. using the Drag Text grip. under Dimension Value. and enter Varies. click Dimension. 121 Click OK. for Below. enter See Schedule.115 In the Type Selector. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog.

127 In the Dimension Text dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 759 . 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. 130 Click OK. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types.125 Select Modify to end the command. and click the dimension text. 128 Click OK. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions.

select the gypsum board region on the left. 138 On the Design Bar. 132 In the Options Bar. 134 Enter Gyp. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. and on the Options Bar.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 135 Select the note. 760 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Board. click (Add Right Arc Leader). click to create an arced leader. and click Modify. 139 Save the file. 133 In the drawing area. click Text. and click to place the text. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

761 . The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets.Finishing the Sheets 14 In this tutorial.rvt. and double-click East.

and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 5 On the Options Bar. for Number of Leaders. 8 Select the keynote.Hexagon. 762 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 7 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Training Files. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. type 1. click Symbol.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. click Modify.rfa.

click (Element Properties). 13 Select the tag. type Seal existing doors and insulate.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click above the tag to place the copy. and click OK. click (Copy). under Identity Data. on the Options Bar. for Text. Creating a Note Block | 763 . 12 On the Edit toolbar.

17 Click OK. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and click. 15 For Text. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 19 With the tag selected. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. click (Element Properties). 18 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. type Repair existing door surround.14 With the copy selected. (Mirror). click Copy. on the Options Bar. type B. on the Edit toolbar. 764 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 16 For Tag.

Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Remove all existing windows. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean exterior brick wall. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 765 . click Modify. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. 22 Optionally. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. and moving counter-clockwise. using the table as a reference. Repair as required.21 On the Design Bar. Tuckpoint as required. Repair existing door surround.

for Heading. 26 Click OK. under Available fields. for Header text. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. type 1/4''. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and for Alignment. for the value. On the Appearance tab. expand Sheets (all). and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. Create. verify that Arial is selected. expand Schedules/Quantities. and double-click A103 . type Description. and click Add. On the Formatting tab. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 766 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . for Sort by. type Mark. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 In the column header (text).Elevations.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and click OK. select Tag. Clean cut and repair wall as required. format. select Tag. and select Bold. select Exterior Construction Notes. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. type Exterior Construction Notes. Select Text. select Center. for Note block name. and click Add. and drag it to the sheet. 29 In the Project Browser.

you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Using Drawing Lists | 767 . 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click T .rvt.Title Sheet. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. under Sheets (all).31 On the Design Bar. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

Select Sheet Name. 768 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and click Add. select Sheet Number. 5 In the list title field. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. and in the third field. 7 In the Project Browser. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select Sheet Index. type T. expand Schedules/Quantities. and drag it to the sheet. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. and click Add. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click T . in the first field. On the Filter tab. ■ 4 Click OK. for Sort by. select Sheet Number. under Available fields. for Filter by. select Sheet Number. select does not equal. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The drawing list displays. in the second field.Title Sheet. under Sheets (all).

annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Finally. On construction documents. door frame schedule. 11 Save the file. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. On construction documents. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model.9 On the Design Bar. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. For the text. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. click Modify. doors. windows. and door frames. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and so on). The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Training File Using Legends | 769 .

type 1/8''. select Arial. click Symbol. type Legend Text.Open Level Head . 10 For Text Size. you create a text type with the necessary size. click . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 6 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. type Typical Symbol Legend.rvt. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Name. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. click Edit/New. 9 For Text Font. for Name. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 770 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. and click OK. click Text.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote .

click Typical Symbol Legend. and for Leader. expand Sheets (all). drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. expand Legends. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and double-click A101 .Site Plan/Floor Plan.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. verify that is selected. Creating a Symbol Legend | 771 . 14 Working from the top down. 16 In the Project Browser.

19 In the Project Browser.Unit 18. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. double-click A102 . click Modify. 23 Save the file. 18 On the Design Bar.17 In the Type Selector. 21 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. under Sheets. and click to place it. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 772 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify.

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. click Modify. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. for Name. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. For View. click Legend Component. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Component Legend | 773 . 8 On the Design Bar.rvt. For Host length. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. select Section. type 4th Floor Wall Types. and on the Options Bar. for Family. type 3'. and click OK. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 3 For Scale. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. and press ENTER. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 9 Select the second wall. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior.

and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. click Text. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 774 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 12 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. click to add text without a leader. for Leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.

Creating a Component Legend | 775 . 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. The text note with leader is added to the legend. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 18 Type the following text. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.

22 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. 24 In the Project Browser. 776 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click OK to accept the default titleblock. select Level 4.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. drag it onto the sheet. under Legends. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. right-click Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select 4th Floor Wall Types.

double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. click Modify to end the command. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Creating a Component Legend | 777 . The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. select the Wall Type 2 component.25 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click (Match Type). Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Project Browser. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. The open drawings are both visible. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar.

32 In the floor plan view. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. select Detail Level: Medium. 778 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 33 Select the patio divider wall. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 34 On the View Control Bar.

Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. In this exercise. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. These changes can be due to owner requests. Using the table. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. click 36 Save the file. or changes in building material availability. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. contractor inquiries. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project.35 Optionally. Using Revision Tracking | 779 . You can create a sequence of revisions. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4.

7 Under Show. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. If you select Per Sheet. if the active revision is number 1. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. for Numbering. When Issued is selected. type a date. 780 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. In most instances. yet as concise as possible. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. If Visible is not selected. When you use this option. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 5 For Description. For example. the revision is locked and issued to the field. In general. verify that Per Project is selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review.

click (Move). 9 Save the file. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.8 Click OK.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 6 On the Design Bar. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 5 Select the divider. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. you make changes to the project floor plan. 3 Select the divider. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. move the cursor up. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Sketching Revision Clouds | 781 . and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. double-click Level 4. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. including revision number and revision date. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision.

The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. 11 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 8 In the drawing area. In the Snaps dialog. 782 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. select Snaps Off. click near the partition you moved. click Finish Sketch. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.

13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 16 Click OK. 17 Save the file. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 783 . 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. for Line Weight. select 6. you load a revision tag into the project.

and because the revision is the first in the project. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. under Floor Plans. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. you create additional revisions in the revision table. click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because you chose to number by project. 12 Save the file. 6 Click Load.rvt. you need to add one.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Working with Revisions In this exercise. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. select Leader. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 8 In the Tags dialog. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 5 In the Tags dialog. 11 Click to place the tag. Training File 784 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 4. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. click Tags. click OK. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. You then issue a revision. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 10 In the drawing area. the cloud is tagged as number 1.rfa. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click Training Files. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

rvt. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. under Sheets. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 8 Add another revision row. NOTE After you issue a revision. type Modify Paving Area. 9 Click OK. select Issued. click Add. You do this by issuing the revision. 7 For Description. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you can no longer modify it. double-click A107 . You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. and enter a date. You can continue to add revisions. and click OK. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and enter a date for the revision. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Unnamed. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. you prevent further changes to the revision. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. Working with Revisions | 785 . Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. with the description Relocate Door.

2 . under Floor Plans. click to add a revision clouds. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule.Modify Paving Area. select Tag ➤ By Category. 11 On the Drafting tab. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 19 To add tags. select Seq. select Revision Cloud. for Revision. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. double-click A107 . 13 Click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser. 786 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. under Sheets (all).Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. double-click Level 4. 12 In the drawing area. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. select the revision cloud. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 20 On the Project Browser. in the drawing area. 3 .Unnamed. 15 On the Options Bar. apply Seq.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 17 Using the same method learned previously.

25 Click OK twice. Click Options. beginning with "D". The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. delete the first 3 characters. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. 26 In the drawing area. select Alphabetic. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. select the titleblock. Working with Revisions | 787 . You do this so that the revision can be changed.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. for Numbering. for Sequence. you edit the titleblock family. height. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. clear Issued. and rotation) to the revision schedule. For each revision.

click Modify. click Yes. and click Properties. select Bottom-up. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Yes. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and drag it above the schedule area. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. Select Grid lines. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 34 On the Design Bar. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. for Appearance. Select Outline. Clear Blank row before data. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and press DELETE.27 On the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the alert dialog. under Other. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. click Edit. click Edit Family. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. for Build Schedule. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. right-click Revision Schedule. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 788 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 33 Select the schedule header. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

Working with Revisions | 789 . and on the Options Bar. for Heading. open the titleblock family for editing. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. enter Rev. click Edit. right-click Revision Schedule. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. under Other. select User defined. 40 Select the revision schedule header. and click Properties. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. for Rotation on Sheet. With a user-defined height. 46 Click OK twice. 45 On the Appearance tab. select the revision schedule.. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. select 90° Counterclockwise. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. When the height property is variable. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. for Formatting. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. for Height.

you learn to import information (such as images. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. text. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Load into Projects. 790 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. click Yes. 50 In the Reload Family dialog.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

under Sheets. double-click T . for Leader. click Modify. click Training Files.Title Sheet. 5 On the Design Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Importing Text Documents In this exercise.JPG.Title Sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. under Sheets. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. double-click T . 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and place it on a sheet. click to add text without a leader. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Image Files | 791 .rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Text. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.

10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 6 Select the text. with the new text box still selected.doc text file in another window. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 11 Save the file.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. Training File 792 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 On the Design Bar. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.

11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Print.rvt.xls. 5 Click OK. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. 10 On the Design Bar. type Fixture Schedule. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Training Files.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Modify. for File name.JPG. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. This step has been completed for you. double-click A102 .mdi. 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 7 In the Revit MEP window. click Desktop.Unit 18. This process may vary from system to system. select the document writer. 3 In Microsoft Excel. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 12 Save the file. under Sheets. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. Importing Spreadsheets | 793 . and saved as Fixture Schedule. and click Save.JPG. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 4 Under Printer. This exercise demonstrates a common method. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.

794 .

you break up the plan into sections. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. as well as a large lab building. To effectively document this project. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. 795 . The large floor plan.Using Dependent Views 15 In this tutorial. called dependent views.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 796 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views .

rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 797 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area, select the crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

798 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

9 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 799

10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

800 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.)

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 801

■ ■ ■ ■

Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16', and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

802 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9. 28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8'', and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 803

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

804 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 805

46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary. 47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

806 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

51 On the View Control Bar, click Apply dependent view settings to other plans

(Hide Crop Region).

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 807

57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you
■ ■ ■ ■

Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

808 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK. 5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping the view to the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 809

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

810 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 811

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

812 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

Using Advanced Features

813

814

Grouping

16

Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical office layouts. After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.

Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

815

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.

2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

816 | Chapter 16 Grouping

Creating and Placing a Group | 817 . and click OK. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. 4 On the Edit toolbar.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen.

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 818 | Chapter 16 Grouping . select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.

and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 819 . expand Model. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click Typical Kitchen. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. under Groups.

14 On the Edit toolbar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 820 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 15 On the Options Bar. clear Copy. click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.

Creating and Placing a Group | 821 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate).

20 On the Design Bar. as shown. one mirrored. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. click Modify. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. and one rotated. 822 | Chapter 16 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

and click Save. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Modifying a Group | 823 . 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click to select it.rvt. click Save As. Modifying a Group In this exercise. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. When you finish editing. you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. press TAB to highlight the wall. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.

(Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). and click to select the door. 7 Click (Group Member. select the element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click to select the wall. 824 | Chapter 16 Grouping . and click member to group instance.3 Click (Group Member. NOTE To display an excluded element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door.). press TAB. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. press TAB.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. clear Tag on Placement. move the cursor to the left. click Door. Modifying a Group | 825 . 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall.8 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 14 On the Options Bar.

select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. click Edit Group. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. All other elements in the model are grayed out. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 22 In the drawing area. 826 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click Modify. move the cursor up. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. In edit group mode. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.16 On the Design Bar.

(Element Properties). All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 28 On the group editor toolbar. created in an earlier lesson. and on the Options Bar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish. enter 7'. for Unconnected Height. which acts as the host. click 27 For Base Offset. Nesting Groups In this exercise. Nesting Groups | 827 . click Modify. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. you add the Typical Kitchen group. enter 3' 4''. 25 Select the opening. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. under Constraints.

3 On the Options Bar. 828 | Chapter 16 Grouping .Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 5 In the drawing area. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. double-click First Floor.rvt. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. select the Typical Kitchen group. in the Project Browser. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 4 On the group editor toolbar. click Edit Group. click (Add to Group).

double-click Second Floor. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar.6 Press TAB. Nesting Groups | 829 . under Floor Plans. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. 8 In the Project Browser. click Finish.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 830 | Chapter 16 Grouping . You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. such as door and window tags. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and filled regions. you add door tags to a group. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. under Floor Plans. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. such as text. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. double-click First Floor.

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and select a point below the left elevator. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 7 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region. Creating a Detail Group | 831 . A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors.

enter Elevator Lobby Tile. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click Modify. 12 Enter Tile. 832 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Design Bar. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click (Group). 16 In the drawing area. click to add an arc leader. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. and click OK. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. as shown. and select the text note and the filled region. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. click Text. 9 On the Options Bar.

22 On the Design Bar. under Groups. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 833 . expand Detail. 21 In the drawing area. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and click Create Instance. double-click Second Floor. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.18 On the Design Bar. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 20 In the Project Browser. Because the detail group contains variables. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. click Modify. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 834 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. as shown. click Modify. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags.rvt. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader.manner that a drawing component can be added. 5 On the Design Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.

Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 835 . click (Group). select Door Tags. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 11 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Second Floor. for Attached Detail Group Name. click Check None.7 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Filter dialog.

15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. therefore. 16 On the Design Bar. Training File 836 | Chapter 16 Grouping . You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. and click OK. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. When you load the group from the library into a new project. click Place Detail. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click Create Instance. for Create new. expand Groups. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. select 2 Bedroom Unit. and expand Model. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 5 In the New Project dialog. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). In this case. verify that Project is selected. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. click Desktop. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Save. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. and click Open. browse to the Desktop. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project.rvt. accept the default template file. 3 For File name. click Modify. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Saving and Loading Groups | 837 . 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance.rvt. and click OK. click OK. and click Save Group. verify that Same as group name is selected. A warning dialog displays. under Groups\Model. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.

15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 838 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click Use Existing. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. and the link is removed. click Remove Link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Training Files. click OK. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. and on the Options Bar. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. When a group is converted to a link. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. and click OK. verify that Attached Details is selected only.rvt file is added as a link to the project. expand Revit Links. click Bind. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 In the message dialog. click Modify. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. select the linked Revit model.rvt. click Link. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.

and click Editable. you specify an active workset. floors. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. called Worksharing. A workset is a collection of building elements. they cannot make changes to it. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. go to the Worksets dialog. use Element Borrowing. In this tutorial. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Using Worksharing. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. however. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. such as annotations and dimensions. doors. 839 . This prevents possible conflicts within the project. such as walls. select the desired workset. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. After the project is shared. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit MEP 2009. Working in a shared project In a shared project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. stairs. The first time you activate worksets within a project. Elements specific to a view. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time.Sharing Projects 17 When working with large building projects. All other team members can view this workset. and so on. When you are working on a shared project. you must first enable Worksharing. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. To make a workset editable. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. You can enable Worksharing for any project.

You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. When setting up Worksharing. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Team size 840 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets required for your work. After learning the fundamentals. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Instead. In the next exercise. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. such as a tenant interior. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. In a multi-story structure. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team.

the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. This allows Revit MEP to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. In most projects. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. When you create a new workset. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. and View worksets. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. When creating the new worksets. You should have at least one workset for each person. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 841 . greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. not including the Project Standards. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. for a typical project. Regardless of the default setting.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Experience has shown that. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. As new members create worksets for their own use. with each assigned a specific functional task. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. designers work in teams. Shared Levels and Grids. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. On this tab. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Team member roles Typically. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared.

you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. As you work. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. When you save locally (to your local file).” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should then save to your local file. This is called “Selective Open. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. This makes them available to other team members. When you save to the central file. However.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. When finished or at regular intervals. your changes are saved. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you can select which workset is active. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. For example. 842 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Generally. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. however. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. When you save to the central file. within the local file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. proceeds as usual. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you make that workset editable by you. the file is saved as the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. On the Options Bar. if a workset named Interior was created. After saving to the central file. Therefore. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. your changes propagate to the entire team.

a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 843 . it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. make any required worksets editable. Alternatively. In this situation. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. To do this. and make that workset editable. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. reload the latest changes from the central file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you work no differently then you would in the office. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. When working remotely. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. using VPN. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. for instance. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit MEP. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. and then save the local file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. if you know who checked out the required workset. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. In this instance. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. save to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings.

Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets.In the next exercise.rvt." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. click Worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. 844 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . click Training Files. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. and open Common\c_Worksets. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. The Worksets dialog displays. 3 In the Worksets dialog. Your username displays as the present owner. and notice all are editable by you.

The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. In this case. clear Families. click OK. 12 Click Rename. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. 13 In the Rename dialog. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. select Workset1. currently named Workset1. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. 8 Click OK. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. In this training file. and click OK. and Views. 16 In the drawing area. 11 In the Worksets dialog. For training purposes. imagine four users including yourself. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 9 Click New. click New. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. ■ 5 Under Show. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 14 In the Worksets dialog. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. You do. For example. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. it is better to make them visible by default. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). you can rename the default workset. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Because the interior walls appear in many views. type the name Exterior Shell. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. Only User-Created worksets should display. expand Floor Plans. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Project Standards.When you enable worksharing. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. In this simple training project. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. another is assigned the interior layout. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. however. When you initially activate Worksharing. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. clear Visible by default in all views. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 845 . Therefore.

click .17 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View menu. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 19 Click OK. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. under Identity Data. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 846 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 21 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. click . and click OK. 20 Select one of the interior walls. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. including the interior doors. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. 29 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Worksets tab. 24 On the Options Bar. stairs. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. under Identity Data. and walls.

select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 43 Click OK. click . 34 In the drawing area. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you enabled Worksharing on a project. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. and click OK. under Identity Data. In this exercise. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 35 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Save. 41 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. double-click Level 2. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. click Save As. under Floor Plans. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. If any interior elements remain. 33 In the Project Browser. select all of the interior elements of the building model. under Views (all). click Non Editable. 30 On the View menu. make sure you remember the location of this central file. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click Close. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 847 .The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click the Worksets tab. 32 Select Interior Layout. Now that you have created the central file. 42 On the right side of the dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click Visibility/Graphics. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 44 On the File menu. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 In the Save As dialog. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Worksets. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Create the central file 37 On the File menu.

Before working on the model. select Interior Layout for Name. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and click OK. In addition. In this case. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. 4 Click Open. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and select Yes for Editable. check out worksets. please do so before continuing. click Save As. 848 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 15 In the Project Browser. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. expand Views (all). and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. make modifications to the building model. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. click Options. Next. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and select Specify. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 2 In the Open dialog. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 844. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select the central file. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. you create your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 12 Click OK. and click OK. and click Save. 6 On the File menu. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. expand Floor Plans. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 7 In the Save As dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select Interior Layout. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. click Worksets. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets. click Open. and double-click Level 1. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 13 On the Window menu. If you have not yet completed the exercise.

24 Click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. If it was owned by another user. click . a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 22 Click OK. click Worksets. click Modify. Working Individually with Worksets | 849 . 18 On the Options Bar. however. you can still edit this wall. 23 On the File menu. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 20 Under Constraints. In this case. In the Worksets dialog. notice the Editable Only option. Because this element is not owned by another user. under Identity Data. Verify that it is cleared. click . you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies your changes.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. and click OK. If this is selected.

29 In the Type Selector. 28 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. 850 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.126mm Partition (2-hr). 34 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Modify. 26 Delete the door. select Basic Wall: Interior . add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Wall. click Door. The precise location is not important. and modify the length so that the corridor is open.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. You modified the building model. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Whenever you save. For training purposes. click Save to Central. When working in your local file. and reload the latest changes. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. you should perform regular saves. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. you created your local file. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. make elements editable. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 851 . select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. each user must check out worksets. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Throughout the process. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. two users access the central file through a network connection. In this particular case. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. In this exercise. save to central. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. At the end of a work session. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. In addition. which matches the information in the Status Bar. displays the workset as well as the element type. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. it is recommended. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. checked out worksets. By default. and save locally immediately afterward. please do so before continuing. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. leave this file open in its current state. Borrowed Elements is selected. add two door openings into the rooms you created. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. a tooltip. you should relinquish all worksets.

14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. In the following section of this exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 7 In the Open dialog. enter User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. In addition. specifically sequenced. click Options. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This file is for your use only. click Worksets. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and click Save. and click OK. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. This is a system setting. and click OK. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. instructions are staggered. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. 15 On the File menu. 12 In the Save As dialog. 9 Click Open. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. You now have a local copy of the project. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. Using a second Revit MEP session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit MEP window. User 2: Create a local file. one user has already created a local file. 2 Start a new Revit MEP session by double-clicking the Revit MEP icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. click Open. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and click OK. consider that person to be User 1. For training purposes.rvt. return to the Settings dialog. and select Yes for Editable. and proceed to Creating a local copy. and select Specify. 11 On the File menu. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 852 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 4 Click the General Tab and. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. skip the following section. under Username. click Options. and reset the Username to your computer login name. click Save As. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. select all the User-Created worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 3 On the Settings menu. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. select the central file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2.

27 On the File menu. If it is not open. 19 On the File menu. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog.” 29 Click OK. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 17 Click OK. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. select the lower exterior wall. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Views (all). User 1: Check out worksets. 24 In the Project Browser. 23 Click OK. it becomes the active workset.You are now the owner of that workset. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. expand Views (all). click Save to Central. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. click Worksets. and double-click Level 1. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. modify the building model. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and select Yes for Editable. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. If you only have one workset checked out. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 853 . A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. expand Floor Plans. open it now.

32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. click Save to Central. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. right-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. under Views (all). 42 Select Furniture Layout. right-click Copy of Level 1.” 35 Click OK. User 1: Reload latest worksets.” 39 Click OK. Before adding any furniture. click Reload Latest. 854 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and click OK. 46 In the Project Browser. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 43 In the Project Browser. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 37 On the File menu. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. When you save to central. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 44 In the Project Browser. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. under Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 45 In the Rename View dialog. However.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. click Worksets. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. you should create a furniture plan view. 33 On the File menu. The changes User 2 made are apparent. click Save to Central. Click Yes. under Floor Plans. 41 On the File menu. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Yes for Editable. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. and click Rename. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide.

click Modify. choose any desk. enter Exterior Wall . 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 Click OK 2 times. the Visible by default option was not selected. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 855 . 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. under Show. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 50 On the View menu. NOTE System families. click Worksets. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. and click OK. 65 Click OK.” 55 Click OK. click Rename. 53 On the File menu. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. select Project Standards. 49 On the Design Bar. click Save to Central. rather than Families. click Edit/New. such as Wall Types.200mm. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Visibility/Graphics. Therefore.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Component. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. are placed under Project Standards. 48 In the Type Selector. 60 In the Rename dialog. and click Element Properties. 63 In the Worksets dialog. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Reload Latest. 66 On the File menu. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click the Worksets tab. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. and click inside any room. click Save to Central. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 62 On the File menu. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser.

856 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Checking out worksets. There are specific instructions for each user. This exercise requires two users and. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. 71 In the Save to Central dialog.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. and these problems are rectified. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save 69 On the File menu. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. select the following. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Each user checked out worksets. select Reload Latest. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 856. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. you save the training file as a central file. you need to set up your central and local files. 3 In the Save As dialog. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. click Options. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. leave this file open in its current state. throughout this training. 70 On the File menu. and published their changes back to the central file. Each user must have network access to the central file. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). leave this file open in its current state. As each of you work. In subsequent steps. and still have your local files open. click Save As. User 1: Reload latest. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. In the final exercise of this tutorial. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. At the appropriate point in this exercise. select Save to Central. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. finished the previous workset exercises. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. and click OK. modified the building model. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section.

name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. click Options. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. This is a system setting. and click Save. select the central file. and click OK. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. return to the Settings dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 15 Click Open. ■ ■ ■ This Revit MEP session is now set up for User 2. select Make this a Central File after save. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. In addition. 18 In the Save As dialog. 12 On the File menu. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Open. Next. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.4 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. 5 Click Save. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. click Save As. 6 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. On the Settings menu. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 8 In the Save As dialog. Set the Username to User 2. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and reset the Username to your computer login name. This is the local file for User 1. and click Save. The central file should still be open. click Options. click Save As. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 857 . verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 17 On the File menu. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 13 In the Open dialog. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and click OK. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. and select Specify.

if any User-Created worksets are not open. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. Afterwards. At this point. 24 Under Active Workset. and click Open. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and then click OK. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select them. click Worksets.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. click the File menu. click Worksets. 858 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. and click Editing Requests. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. double-click Level 1. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and select Yes for Editable. verify that Editable Only is cleared. under Floor Plans. After you submit the request. You are now the owner of that workset. 27 Under Active Workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 29 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. select Exterior Shell. select the Interior Layout workset. select Interior Layout. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 22 In the Worksets dialog. select the second window from the top. You are now the owner of that workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and select Yes for Editable. 30 On the left exterior wall. 26 In the Worksets dialog.

select the following. A message informs you that your request has been granted. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. to Local. 35 Click Grant.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and the other user granted it. you requested permission to edit the element. and notice the window is in the new location. click Close. In this multi-user exercise. In this case. select Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 859 . select the request submitted by User 2. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. click Check Now. and click OK. 38 Click OK. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and close 39 On the File menu. 36 Click Close.

860 .

and each option set can have multiple schemes. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In addition. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client.Creating Multiple Design Options 18 When working with a building model. 861 . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have multiple sets of design options. For example. In this tutorial. After you and the client agree on the final design. At any time in the design process. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes.

each is constructed for interchangeability. you can edit it. you set up multiple design option sets. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. click Training Files. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. make your final design decision. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. With the second option. and delete the unwanted options from the project. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the final exercise of this lesson. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. under Option Set. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). The client has asked you to create various options. click New.In this particular case.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. In the first exercise in this lesson. 2 In the Design Options dialog. each with multiple design options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. After you create a design option. 862 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . the only available command is to create a new option set. the roof and structure systems must work together. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. In the second exercise. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. TIP In this exercise. therefore. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you design each of the structural options. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options.

10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. click Edit Selected. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 9 On the Design Bar. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and click Close. 11 On the Edit toolbar. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). click 12 On the Options Bar. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and the third column centered between the two. add three columns. In this case. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls.3 Select Option 1 (primary). By selecting Multiple. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. 7 In the Type Selector. In the following illustration. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 4 In the Project Browser. click Column. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. or add a dimension string between the columns. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. select: ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. expand Floor Plans. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. expand Views (all). TIP To center the middle column. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 5 On the View menu. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. Creating the Structural Design Options | 863 .

When you are finished. Because of the size of the columns. they are difficult to see in this view. click . A copy of the three selected columns is added.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 17 Zoom out and. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. using the same technique. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 864 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 18 On the View toolbar.

Zoom in on the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. under Floor Plans. Next. 21 In the Type Selector. Creating the Structural Design Options | 865 . click Beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 23 On the Design Bar. The first click specifies the beam start point. click Modify. Use the following illustration as a guide. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. In it. select Round Bar : 2". You can do this manually or use the Copy command. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click TOP OF CORE.Notice the 12 columns that you added. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add the beams that span the columns. Adding a beam is a two-click process. The second click specifies the end of the beam. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns.

click . 866 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . zoom into the left column. 28 Zoom out. move down to the next set of columns. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. select: ■ ■ ■ .25 On the Edit toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and click the center point. 30 On the View toolbar. click 26 On the Options Bar. and select the center of the column to add a copy.

enter Structure for New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. 42 Select Option Set 1 and.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 36 In the Rename dialog. There should now be two roofing design options. click Rename. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. click Rename. click New. click New. 38 In the Rename dialog. 41 Under Option Set. enter Roofing for New. click Rename. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. and click OK. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 867 . name the option Louvers. 43 In the Rename dialog. enter Brackets for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). under Option. 46 Under Option. enter Beam for New. click Rename. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click New. under Option. select Option 1 (primary). 40 In the Rename dialog. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. not a new option set. 33 Click Finish Editing. under Option. and click OK. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option Set. 45 Under Roofing. under Option Set. and click OK. and click OK.

Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Option 2. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. name the option Sunscreen. 52 Click Close.47 Under Roofing. 868 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 53 In the Project Browser. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 48 Under Option. select Edit Selected. click Rename. and click OK. When finished. under Floor Plans. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Beam. Under Now Editing. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. it will resemble the following illustration. under Structure. you create the second design option. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 51 Under Edit.

56 In the Type Selector. select Roof Beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. click Align.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Creating the Structural Design Options | 869 . 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Component. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Refer to the following illustration. 58 On the Tools menu. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.

62 Select the beam and.60 After aligning the beam. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 870 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify. 61 On the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. The first click sets the move start point. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . The second click represents the move end point.

you need this file in its current state. i_Urban_House-in progress. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 66 On the View toolbar. 69 Click Close.rvt. 70 On the File menu. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click Save. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 68 In the Design Options dialog. name the file. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 67 On the Tools menu. which is visible by default. click Save As. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Finish Editing. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. Creating the Structural Design Options | 871 . click .Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.

open it now. click Component.rvt. expand Views (all). place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'.In this exercise. under Roofing. 872 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. each with multiple design options to pick from. 3 In the Design Options dialog. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. you set up multiple design option sets. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. delete them after the rafter is in place. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 2 On the Tools menu. Under Now Editing. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click TOP OF CORE. In the next exercise. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. If you need to add dimensions. 8 In the Type Selector. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. you design each of the roofing options. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. The first option. a Louver system. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. select Louvers (primary). Sunscreen. 4 Under Edit. 10 Referring to the following illustration. 5 Click Close. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. do so now. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. select Rafter 2 x 10. click Edit Selected. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. expand Floor Plans. The second roofing system. the other for beams. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. With the second option. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial.

17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click Modify. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 873 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and click OK. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. enter 38' 6" for Length. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Edit menu. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. Enter 5 for Number. Select Constrain. under Other. 13 On the Options Bar. click . 16 On the Options Bar.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Array. Select 2nd for Move To.

The space separates feet and inches. rather than entering 3' 3". and press ENTER. For example. 874 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 3' 3". when the listening dimension displays. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. TIP When entering a dimension value. you can enter 3 3.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers.

when the listening dimension displays. under Other. 27 For the array starting point. click the Edit menu. select Louver 2 x 6. and select the louver you just placed. 20 In the Type Selector. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and press Enter. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. Select 2nd for Move To. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 875 . enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click . 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. enter 1’. Enter 34 for Number. and click OK. 23 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Component. and click Array.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. 22 On the Design Bar. Select Constrain. and.

click . 876 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . The louver roof system is complete. under Edit. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 29 On the View toolbar. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Finish Editing.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 30 On the Tools menu.

39 On the Design Bar. 33 Under Editing. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. select Sunscreen. The first two points define the ends of the line. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. under Roofing. In this case. Therefore. and then click Close. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Click OK. expand Elevations. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 40 On the Options Bar. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. and click OK. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. click Lines. and the third point defines the arc. 43 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Project Browser. 41 Select the top of the left column. the top of the next column on the right. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 877 . then you can modify it through the dimension. click Properties. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. You will fix this in a later step. and double-click West. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. click Edit Selected.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays.

under Edit. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 48 On the Design Bar. 45 Click OK. 46 On the Tools menu. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. 52 On the File menu. you designed each of the roofing options. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Trim/Extend. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. The louver roof system is complete. a Louver system. 51 In the Design Options dialog. click Finish Editing. 878 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . Sunscreen. click Save. In this exercise. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. Under Constraints. you need this file in its current state. The first option. The arcs should connect. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. then the center arc. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The second roofing system. Select the right arc.44 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Constraints. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. and then click Close. 50 On the Tools menu. 49 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion.

Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. and delete the discarded design options. double-click Secondary Option. do so now. expand 3D Views. under Views (all). under Views (all). you select a design. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. 9 Click OK. 5 Right-click each of the copies. and click Rename. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. tertiary. 11 On the View menu. right-click {3D}. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. under Views (all). and last options. click Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. secondary. click the Design Options tab. and click Rename. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Primary Option.Managing Design Options In this exercise. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. under Views (all). make it part of the building model. double-click Primary Option. 7 On the View menu. 10 In the Project Browser. After exploring the combinations. Managing Design Options | 879 . If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial.

21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. double-click Tertiary Option.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). 15 On the View menu. double-click Last Option. and click OK. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 880 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 On the View menu. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all).

click Close. click Yes. Because the client has selected the design option. In this case. under Structure. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click Primary Option. click Delete. click Yes. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. 27 In the alert dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. In your design options. the beam option becomes part of the model. select Beam. 25 Select Structure. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 22 On the Tools menu. 24 Under Option. but should be accepted as part of the building model. This was the client choice for structural. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. An alert is displayed. click Accept Primary. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. select Make Primary.At this point. Managing Design Options | 881 . The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 29 Select Roofing. The set is deleted. 26 Under Option Set. 30 Under Option Set. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the current primaries are no longer options. 31 In the alert dialog.

click Save. 882 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 35 On the File menu. made it part of the building model. you selected a design.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. After exploring the combinations. In this exercise. and deleted the discarded design options.

and then add new building model elements. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. In the lesson and exercises that follow. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project.Project Phasing 19 In any project. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. demolish existing construction. For the client. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. You create new phases. complete with schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. then add new walls and doors in a different location. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. demolish existing walls and doors. In the second exercise. This changes room definition and total building model area. In the second exercise. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. 883 . You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. You create new phases.

You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. click (Element Properties). expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This means that all building model elements. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. click Modify.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. go to the Settings menu. 4 Click Cancel.rvt. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. are visible in this view. regardless of phase. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. and open Common\c_Phasing. click Training Files. click Project Units. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. As you add new elements to the building model. 884 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. expand Floor Plans. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. under Phasing. During the demolition and renovation process. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. 7 Click Cancel. define the units. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. 6 On the Options Bar. When you create a new project. If you wish to do so. In the Element Properties dialog. you work in a simple model that requires renovation.

it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 19 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 . Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties.Existing. After you create the views. click (Filter Selection). clear Door Tags. click . Because this is a renovation project. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. Phasing Your Model | 885 . enter Level 1 . 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. Because this is a phase-specific view. right-click Level 1 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Demo. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. select Existing. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. and click OK. all of the building model elements. under Phasing. 10 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 1. TIP If this were a multi-story building.Existing.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. and click OK. for Phase Created. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. under Floor Plans. and click Rename.Existing. click Modify. and click Rename. 11 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. After you release the mouse button. are highlighted in red. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Rename dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 16 In the Rename dialog. including the door tags. 17 Click No. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. right-click Copy of Level 1 .

In this case. under New. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 21 In the Project Browser. Demolished. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. under Phasing. Existing. and Temporary. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. 24 In the Project Browser. Phase status is time-dependent. 26 In the Phasing dialog. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. however. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. new construction occurs after existing construction. for Phase. There are five default phase filters. Next. You may need to zoom in to see this. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. you modify these settings. click the Phase Filters tab. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status.Demo. to which all the building model elements belong. double-click Level 1 . On a logical time line. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. under Floor Plans. Later in this exercise. 28 Under Filter Name. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. and click OK. enter Composite Plan. Because of this time relationship. select Overridden. 27 Click New. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 886 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . 29 For Composite Plan. select Existing.Existing. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view.

Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. Phasing Your Model | 887 . you demolish all elements hosted by it. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. select red. When you demolish the host. under Floor Plans. 39 In the Phasing dialog. double-click Level 1 . specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. click OK.31 Under Phase Status. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. select the line style. select Demolished.Demo. double-click Level 1 . This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. There are two ways to demolish an element. under Floor Plans. 36 Using the same method. As you click each wall. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 34 In the Color dialog. 42 In the Project Browser. select a lighter blue. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. under Cut ➤ Lines. select the interior walls one at a time. 32 In the Demolished row. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. its display changes to a red dashed line. click (Demolish). or you can use the demolish tool. you begin demolition. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. Next. click the value for Color. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser.Existing. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. 35 Click OK twice.

52 Open Level 1 . under Phasing. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. The demolished walls no longer display. click Wall. for Phase Filter. 888 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . 48 Using the following illustration as a guide.Existing.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr).44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Door. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Phase Filter. under Phasing. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show Previous + New. 50 In the Type Selector. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 49 On the Design Bar. 53 Open Level 1 .Demo. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. add a long horizontal wall. 47 In the Type Selector. 46 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 51 Add a door leading into each room. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. and click OK. select Basic Wall: Interior . and click OK.

New. The renovated building model plan is displayed. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 60 On the View toolbar. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . and existing shows as half-tone. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. All elements are displayed in this view.Demo. because the phase filter is set to Show All. 62 If necessary. Phasing Your Model | 889 . 61 On the View Control Bar.New. right-click Level 1 . new is shown in blue. regardless of phase. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 57 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 59 Open Level 1 . Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. click (Default 3D View). which are displayed as red.

In this view.New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can do so at this time. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. expand Views (all). Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In this exercise. 63 Close the file. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. and new construction. the rooms change in both definition and size. As the renovation process continues. If you wish to save this file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Level 1 . 3 Open Level 1 . go to the Settings menu. demolition. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. define the units. you can see the new walls added to the building model. 2 Open Level 1 . In the next exercise. Notice that this view is the original building model.rvt. and click OK.Existing. sizes. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. click Training Files. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags.Demo. therefore. you do not need to change the project units to metric. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. 890 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . You can also see that the room quantities. In this view. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. expand Floor Plans. click Project Units. All room boundaries are phase-specific. If you wish to do so. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and locations change depending on the phase of the project.

Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 891 . 9 On the Design Bar.Existing. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. click in each room as you move to the right. In the Phasing dialog.Demo. 13 Open Level 1 . 5 Click OK. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click Room Tag.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 6 Open Level 1 . 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Open Level 1 . click Room. click Modify.New. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Room. and maximize the view. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. yet they have different room numbers.

Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 17 On the Window menu. 16 In the Project Browser.Existing.New Construction. click Close Hidden Windows. In this exercise. 20 Close the file. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. In this case. In addition. View phase-specific room schedules. and double-click Room Schedule . add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 19 On the Window menu. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. expand Schedules/Quantities. The two schedule views tile. 18 Open Room Schedule . you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. 892 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . click Tile.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase.

or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. You position the building models on the site plan. performance. In this tutorial. This maximizes efficiency. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In the final lesson. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. modify their visibility. Comparison of alternatives on a site. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. 893 . In these situations. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. and manage the links throughout the project.

you open a project in which only site components have been developed. NOTE The center of a Revit MEP model is the center of the model geometry. One building model is a condominium. You position the building models on the site. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .Center to Center: Revit MEP places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. modify their visibility. You link two building models to the project. and the other is a townhouse. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit MEP 2009 to automatically place it. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. 894 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.Linking Building Models In this lesson.

All three files now reside. RELATED See the lesson. c_Townhouse. 4 On the File menu. Otherwise. 5 On the File menu.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 895 . Auto .Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit MEP Files. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Select c_Site. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. and open Common\c_Site. 2 On the File menu. this option will place the link at a predefined location. with write permission. and save the file there.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. this system is not exposed to the user. click Save As. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Manual .■ Auto . Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. ■ ■ Manual . right-click. and click OK. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Revit MEP projects have an internal coordinate system. click Training Files. click Close.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit MEP model. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 911. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. c_Condo_Complex. and click Properties. This option is grayed out. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. click Open. 8 Clear Read-only. click Open. select the three files. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. you can do so.rvt. however.

896 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. and double-click Level 1. 13 Click Open. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. expand Views (all).Origin to Origin. expand Floor Plans. select Auto .■ Click Open. For Positioning.

16 For the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The linked model moves as one object. Standard move commands work with linked building models. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 897 . After you select it. click t